Home

ZyXEL ADSL2+ User's Manual

1. en cats 1 3 Prestige Hardware Installation and Connection Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware installation and connection 1 4 Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel Table 2 Front Panel LED Description LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR SYS Green The Prestige is receiving power and functioning properly Blinking The Prestige is rebooting The Prestige is not ready or has malfunctioned Red Jo The power to the Prestige is too low 37 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 2 Front Panel LED Description LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION 10 100M Green The Prestige has a successful 10Mbps Ethernet connection Blinking The Prestige is receiving or sending data Amber On Blinking The Prestige is receiving or sending data OR The LAN is not connected DSL Green The Prestige is linked successfully to a DSLAM Blinking The Prestige is initializing the DSL line Slow Blinking The Prestige is sending or receiving non PPP traffic Fast The DSL link is down Amber The Prestige has a PPP PPPoA or PPPoE connection Blinking The Prestige is sending or receiving PPPoA or PPPoE traffic Off The Prestige does not have a PPP PPPoA or PPPoE connection The Prestige has a successful 100Mbps Ethernet connection Nes Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 38 P 660R T Series User s Guide
2. Appendix F Log Descriptions 290 P 660R T Series User s Guide 291 Table 105 ICMP Notes continued TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION smau gt PE A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network Ji 1 Redirect datagramsiortheNework O OC fi fedveetdaiagrams tormens oooO fe Redirect datagrams forthe Type of Service and Nework 5 Redirect datagrams forthe Type of Service and Host DSLR fo femmes mo meses 1 meter O fi Fregmentreassembiy ime excess oOoOoO ao pamere J5 fPomierindestesmeemr SSCS cs Jnmesem fo Jnmesamprequestmess e O um frmestamprey fo Jnmesamprepymesse 5 fmomatonreguet SSCS fr _ infermaton requestmessage OOS ie fmomaton r y fo fmomaionreplymess e OOS Appendix F Log Descriptions P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix G PPPoE PPPoE in Action An ADSL modem bridges a PPP session over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 from your computer to an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit which connects to a DSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates see Figure 200 on page 293 One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Benefits of PPPoE PPPoE offers the following benefits
3. 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page 3 Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement P 660R T Series User s Guide Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord e Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel can service the device Please contact your vendor for further information e Use ONLY the dedicated power supply for your device Connect the power cord or power adaptor to the right supply voltage 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe e Do NOT use the device if the power supply is damaged as it might cause electrocution e Ifthe power supply is damaged remove it from the power outlet e Do NOT attempt to repair the power supply Contact your local vendor to order a new power supply e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord and do NOT locate the product where anyone can walk on the power cord e If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical gas or water pipes will be damaged Do NOT
4. If the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen are not specified for instance left as 0 0 0 0 the Prestige tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server When a computer sends a DNS query to the Prestige the Prestige forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the LAN Setup screen This way the Prestige can pass the DNS servers to the computers and the computers can query the DNS server directly without the Prestige s intervention 5 3 DNS Server Address Assignment 59 Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses e The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen e The Prestige acts as a DNS proxy when the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields are left blank i
5. Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Primary DNS Servers 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Add ress 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B Multicast None IP Policies Edit IP Alias No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 133 Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Follow the instructions in the following table on how to configure the DHCP fields Table 40 DHCP Ethernet Setup DHCP If set to Server your Prestige can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server in this case When DHCP server is used the following items need to be set Client IP Pool This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the Secondary DNS DHCP cli
6. These screens display information to help you identify problems with the DSL line Use this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige Click this label to exit the web configurator Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Wizard Setup This chapter provides information on the Wizard Setup screens for Internet access in the web configurator 3 1 Introduction Use the Wizard Setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information provided by your ISP Your ISP may have already configured some of the fields in the wizard screens for you 3 1 1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The Prestige supports the following methods 3 1 1 1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP is only implemented with the IP network protocol IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the ENET ENCAP Gateway field in the second wizard screen You can get this information from your ISP 3 1 1 2 PPP over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP The Prestige bridges a PPP session over Ethernet PPP over E
7. 167 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 98 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type One to One Local IP start End N A Global IP Start End N A Server Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table explains the fields in this menu Table 53 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set FIELD DESCRIPTION Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select from a total of five types These are the mapping types discussed in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this computer See Section 21 5 3 on page 172 for an example Local IP Only local IP fields are N A for server Global IP fields MUST be set for Server This is the starting local IP address ILA End This is the ending local IP address ILA If the rule is for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0 0 0 0 and the End IP as 255 255 255 255 This field is N A for One to One and Server types Start This is the starting inside global IP address IGA If you have a dynamic IP enter 0 0 0 0 as the Global IP Start Note Note that Global IP Start can be set to 0 0 0 0 only if the types are Many to One or Server This is the ending inside global IP address IGA This field is N A for One to One Many to One and Serv
8. KE um J 4 IGA 3 gt Inside web server and mail server Incoming Traffic 8 Ve e 7 o Mall Server 192 168 1 20 fl Mi FTP Server 1 FIP Server 2 j e H 194 164 1 11 x EEI E Am 10 132 50 2 10 132 50 3 In this case you need to configure Address Mapping Set 1 from Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Therefore you must choose the Full Feature option from the Network Address Translation field in menu 4 or menu 11 3 in Figure 107 on page 173 1 Enter 15 from the main menu 2 Enter 1 to configure the Address Mapping Sets 3 Enter I to begin configuring this new set Enter a Set Name choose the Edit Action and then enter 1 for the Select Rule field Press ENTER to confirm 4 Select Type as One to One direct mapping for packets going both ways and enter the local Start IP as 192 168 1 10 the IP address of FTP Server 1 the global Start IP as 10 132 50 1 our first IGA See Figure 108 on page 174 5 Repeat the previous step for rules 2 to 4 as outlined above When finished menu 15 1 1 should look like as shown in Figure 109 on page 174 Figure 107 Example 3 Menu 11 3 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min 0 Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 My WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT Full Feature Address Mapping Set 2 Metric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B Multicast
9. Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country D ZyXEL Limited Warranty P 660R T Series User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support e Product model and serial number e Warranty Information e Date that you received your device e Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FTP SITE support zyx
10. System Maintenance Log and Trace Figure 135 Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace 1 View Error Log 2e UNEX SYSLOG Please enter selection 3 Enter 1 from Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace to display the error log in the system After the Prestige finishes displaying the error log you will have the option to clear it Samples of typical error and information messages are presented in the next figure Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 200 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 136 Sample Error and Information Messages 52 Sat Jan 01 00 00 00 2000 PP12 INFO LAN promiscuous mode lt 1 gt 53 Sat Jan 01 00 00 00 2000 PPOO INFO Last errorlog repeat 1 Times 54 Sat Jan UL 0000700 2000 PPOO WARN SNMP TRAP 0 cold start 55 Sat Jan 01 00 00 00 2000 PPOO INFO main init completed 56 Sat Jan 01 00200200 2000 PPOO INFO Starting Connectivicy Monitor 57 Sat Jam Ol 00 00 00 2000 Pele INFO monitoring NAN Gonn ctivity 58 Sat Jan 01 00 00 00 2000 PP0a WARN MPOA Link Down 59 Sate dan OL 00 00202 2000 PPO9 WARN SNMP TRAP 30 LIAK Up 60 Sat Jan 01 00 00 05 2000 PPlb INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 61 Sat dan OL 00 01 36 2000 PPLA INFO SMT Password pass 62 Sat Jan 01 00 01 36 2000 PPOO INFO SMT Session Begin 63 Sat Jan O1 00 03 59 2000 PP00 WARN MilSave Iface not found for DDNS Clear Error Log y n 24 4 2 Syslog and Account
11. 39 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access and navigate the web configurator 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Prestige setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default 2 1 1 Accessing the Prestige Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Prestige hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Prepare your computer computer network to connect to the Prestige refer to Appendix B on page 258 3 Launch your web browser 4 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL 5 An Enter Network Password window displays Enter the password 1234 is the default Click Login to proceed to a screen asking you to change your password Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 40 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 3 Password Screen Prestige 660R T3 T7 Enter Password and click Login
12. IP Alias 2 No IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A RIP Direction N A Version N A Incoming protocol filters N A Outgoing protocol filters N A Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Follow the instructions in the following table to configure IP Alias parameters Table 42 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup DESCRIPTION IP Alias Choose Yes to configure the LAN network for the Prestige IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP direction Choices are None Both In Only or Out Only Version Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP version Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Incoming Enter the filter set s you wish to apply to the incoming traffic between this node and Protocol Filters the Prestige Outgoing Enter the filter set s you wish to apply to the outgoing traffic between this node and Protocol Filters the Prestige When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 17 5 Route IP Setup The first step is to enable the IP routing in Menu 1 General Setup To edit menu 1 type 1 in the main menu and press ENTER
13. IP Source Route is an optional header that dictates the route an IP packet takes from its source to its destination If Yes the rule applies to any packet with an IP source route The majority of IP packets do not have source route Destination IP Addr Type the destination IP address of the packet you want to filter This field is ignored if it is 0 0 0 0 IP Mask Type the IP mask to apply to the Destination IP Addr field Port Type the destination port of the packets you want to filter The field range is 0 to 65535 A 0 field is ignored Port Comp Select the comparison to apply to the destination port in the packet against the value given in Destination Port Choices are None Less Greater Equal or Not Equal sure S IP Addr Type the source IP Address of the packet you want to filter A 0 0 0 0 field is ignored IP Mask Type the IP mask to apply to the Source IP Addr field 183 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 56 Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Port Type the source port of the packets you want to filter The range of this field is 0 to 65535 A 0 field is ignored Port Comp Select the comparison to apply to the source port in the packet against the value given in Source Port field Choices are None Less Greater Equal or Not Equal TCP Estab This applies only when the IP Protocol field is 6 TCP If Yes the rule matches packets t
14. It provides you with a familiar dial up networking DUN user interface It lessens the burden on the carriers of provisioning virtual circuits all the way to the ISP on multiple switches for thousands of users For GSTN PSTN and ISDN the switching fabric is already in place It allows the ISP to use the existing dial up model to authenticate and optionally to provide differentiated services Traditional Dial up Scenario The following diagram depicts a typical hardware configuration where the computers use traditional dial up networking Appendix G PPPoE 292 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 200 Single Computer per Router Hardware Configuration Concentrator How PPPoE Works The PPPoE driver makes the Ethernet appear as a serial link to the computer and the computer runs PPP over it while the modem bridges the Ethernet frames to the Access Concentrator AC Between the AC and an ISP the AC is acting as a L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol LAC L2TP Access Concentrator and tunnels the PPP frames to the ISP The L2TP tunnel is capable of carrying multiple PPP sessions With PPPoE the VC Virtual Circuit is equivalent to the dial up connection and is between the modem and the AC as opposed to all the way to the ISP However the PPP negotiation 1s between the computer and the ISP Prestige as a PPPoE Client 293 When using the Prestige as a PPPoE client the computers on the LAN see only Ethernet and are not
15. Network Connections Favorites Edit view File Tools Settee Help Operator Assisted Dialing Dial up Preferences Network Connections Network Identification Bridge Connections Advanced Settings Optional Networking Components Address Network Tasks fal Create mesk anner Firan 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 38 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add ot remove components of Windows AP To add or remove component click the checkbos 4 shaded bos means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in component click Details Components L Management and Monitoring Tools Networking Services 0 3 MB BW wl Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a varety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available op disk 260 9 ME 5 In the Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 39 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove component click the check bos shaded bos means that only part of the compone
16. Set the Route IP field to Yes by pressing SPACE BAR Chapter 17 Internet Access 138 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 70 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup System Name Location location Contact Person s Name Domain Name Edit Dynamic DNS No Route IP Yes Bridge No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 17 6 Internet Access Configuration Menu 4 allows you to enter the Internet access information in one screen Menu 4 is actually a simplified setup for one of the remote nodes that you can access in menu 11 Before you configure your Prestige for Internet access you need to collect your Internet account information Note that if you are using PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation then the only ISP information you need is a login name and password You only need to know the Ethernet Encapsulation Gateway IP address if you are using ENET ENCAP encapsulation From the main menu type 4 to display Menu 4 Internet Access Setup as shown next 139 Chapter 17 Internet Access P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 71 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based VPI 8 VCI 35 ATM QoS Type CBR Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 My Login N A My Password N A ENET ENCAP Gateway N A IP Address Assignment Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translat
17. Value N A More No Log None Action Matched Check Next Rule Action Not Matched Check Next Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The next table describes the fields in the Generic Filter Rule menu Table 57 Menu 21 1 5 1 Generic Filter Rule FIELD DESCRIPTION Filter This is the filter set filter rule coordinates for instance 2 3 refers to the second filter set and the third rule of that set Filter Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a type of rule Parameters displayed below each type will be different Choices are Generic Filter Rule or TCP IP Filter Rule Select Yes to turn on or No to turn off the filter rule Offset Type the starting byte of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare The range for this field is from 0 to 255 Length Type the byte count of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare The range for this field is 0 to 8 Type the mask in Hexadecimal to apply to the data portion before comparison Type the value in Hexadecimal to compare with the data portion More If Yes a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields If More is Yes then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be N A Log Select the logging option from the following None No packets will be logged Action Matched Only matching packets and rules will be logged Action N
18. 25 4 5 TFTP File Upload The Prestige also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To transfer the firmware and the configuration file follow the procedure shown next 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter CI mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance 3 Enter the command sys stdio 0 to disable the console timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter sys stdio 5 to restore the five minute console timeout default when the file transfer is complete 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer 5 Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer The file name for the firmware is ras Note that the telnet connection must be active and the Prestige in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the P
19. 285 Appendix D Splitters and Microfilters P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix E Command Interpreter The following describes how to use the command interpreter Enter 24 in the main menu to bring up the system maintenance menu Enter 8 to go to Menu 24 8 Command Interpreter Mode See the included disk or zyxel com for more detailed information on these commands Note Use of undocumented commands or misconfiguration can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable Command Syntax e The command keywords are in courier new font e Enter the command keywords exactly as shown do not abbreviate e The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt e The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets e The symbol means or For example sys filter netbios config lt type gt lt on off gt means that you must specify the type of netbios filter and whether to turn it on or off Command Usage A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or at the command prompt Always type the full command Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished Appendix E Command Interpreter 286 P 660R T Series User s Guide 287 Appendix E Command Interpreter P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix F Log Descriptions This appendix provides descriptions of example log messages Table 100 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE Time Calibration is successful Time calibration
20. NAT Screens 76 P 660R T Series User s Guide 7 1 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping see Table 15 on page 79 NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your Prestige filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 7 1 3 How NAT Works I Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN
21. No Action Not Matched Action Matched Check Next Rule Check Next Rule Drop Forward Le alle AR DN D NR Drop Forward gt y y y y y y C Drop Packet D Check Next Rule Accept Packet j 22 4 2 Generic Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a generic filter rule The purpose of generic rules is to allow you to filter non IP packets For IP it is generally easier to use the IP rules directly For generic rules the Prestige treats a packet as a byte stream as opposed to an IP packet You specify the portion of the packet to check with the Offset from 0 and the Length fields both in bytes The Prestige applies the Mask bit wise ANDing to the data portion before comparing the result against the Value to determine a match The Mask and Value fields are specified in hexadecimal numbers Note that it takes two hexadecimal digits to represent a byte so if the length is 4 the value in either field will take 8 digits for example FFFFFFFF 185 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide To configure a generic rule select an empty filter set in menu 21 for example 5 Select Generic Filter Rule in the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule as shown in the following figure Figure 121 Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule Plier ae Sj Filter Type Generic Filter Rule Active No Offset 0 Length 0 Mask N A
22. Subnet 2 Figure 21 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup sgr sstzsttSsspzsptSsttSttSsttsttzSttSSt z D N a Subnet 1 192 168 1 1 192168 1 24 a F F i a F F a Emi Ea a t D D 8 LAN m hk Ch P K weg emm D KC 3 R K kee Leer r 2 SE nr RE ene Intemet rs YT WWW we ww TET Y Y 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 2 E r mae 3 Backup Gatew ay 6 8 Configuring WAN Backup To change your Prestige s WAN backup settings click WAN then WAN Backup The screen appears as shown Chapter 6 WAN Setup 72 P 660R T Series User s Guide 73 Figure 22 WAN Backup WAN WAN Backup Setup Backup Type Check WARM IP Address DSL Link 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Fail Tolerance Recovery Interval Timeout Traffic Redirect Active Metric Backup Gateway b D se fo SEC Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 VAN Backup LABEL Backup Type Check WAN IP Address1 3 Fail Tolerance Recovery Interval DESCRIPTION Select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection Select DSL Link to have the Prestige check if the connection to the DSLAM is up Select ICMP to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields Configure this field to test your Prestige s WAN accessibility
23. You can apply up to 4 schedule sets in Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile From the main menu enter 26 to access Menu 26 Schedule Setup as shown next Figure 163 Menu 26 Schedule Setup Menu 26 Schedule Setup Schedule Schedule Enter Schedule Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Name N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Lower numbered sets take precedence over higher numbered sets thereby avoiding scheduling conflicts For example if sets 1 2 3 and 4 in are applied in the remote node then set I will take precedence over set 2 3 and 4 as the Prestige by default applies the lowest numbered set first Set 2 will take precedence over set 3 and 4 and so on You can design up to 12 schedule sets but you can only apply up to four schedule sets for a remote node Note To delete a schedule set enter the set number and press SPACE BAR and then ENTER or Delete in the Edit Name field Chapter 29 Call Scheduling 238 P 660R T Series User s Guide To setup a schedule set select the schedule set you want to setup from menu 26 1 12 and press ENTER to see Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup as shown next Figure 164 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup Active Yes Start Date yyyy mm dd 2000 OL O1 How Often Once Once Date yyyy mm day 2000 OL OL Weekdays Sunday N A Monday N A Tuesday N A Wednesday N A Thursday N A Friday N A Saturday N A Start Time h
24. h Telnet Telnet traffic is blocked from the VAN to the LAN hv FTP FTP traffic is blocked from the VAN to the LAN If TFTP TFTFP traffic is blocked from the WAN to the LAM W eh Web traffic is blocked from the WAN to the LAN Ic SMP SMMP traffic is blocked from the WAN m Ping Ping traffic is blocked from the WAN Apply Cancel Once you apply the filter rules in the web configurator filter sets 11 and 12 are automatically applied in the protocol filters field under Input Filter Sets in SMT menu 11 5 Note SMT input protocol filter set numbers that were previously applied are erased after you apply the Internet Security filter rules in the web configurator To reapply them or apply new filter sets you need to enter the filter set numbers again along with filter sets 11 and 12 For example to apply filter sets 1 and 2 you enter 1 2 11 12 18 4 2 Web Configurator Filter Sets When you apply filter rules using the web configurator filter sets 11 and 12 are automatically generated in SMT menu 21 This feature is not available on all models 149 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 79 Menu 21 Filer Set Configuration Menu 21 Filter Set Confiquration Filter Filter Set Comments Set Comments 1 fl 2 NetBIOS WAN 8 3 NetBIOS LAN 9 4 IGMP 10 5 11 WebSet1 6 12 WebSet
25. mmeedsaeidi rdiekse 218 FET T NNE seriinin aaa aai araara arans 218 Figure 149 Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control 219 Figure 150 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management rrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnen 219 Figure 151 Menu 24 System Maintenance 220 Figure 152 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting rrrrnrrrnrrrnnrvnnnnnn 221 Figure 153 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control arrrannnnnrnnnnnnannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 225 Figure 154 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup rrnnrrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennn 229 Figure 155 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup rranrrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnsenne 230 Figure 156 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing FONN EE 231 Figure 157 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup rrranrrnnrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 233 Figure 158 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options rrrrnrrernnnnrnnnennnnnnnnnennnnen 233 Figure 159 Example of IP Policy Routing 234 Figure 160 IF Roung FOR AIF WEE 234 Figure 161 IP Routing Policy Example EE 235 Figure 162 Applying IP Policies Example rarrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnenne 236 Figure 183 Men 25 Schedule Ne 238 Figure 164 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup ENEE ENEE 239 Figure 165 Applying Schedule Set s to a Remote Node PPPOE rrrnrnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnevnnnnnn 240 21 P 660R T Series User s Guide PI NNN JE 247
26. 06 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C02 Call Terminated 2 Packet Triggered sdcmndsyslogsend SYSLOG FKTITRI SYSLOG NOTICE String String Packet trigger Protocol xx Data xxxxxxxXXX X Protocol 1 IP 2 IPX 3 IPXHC 4 BPDU 5 ATALK 63 PNG Data We will send forty eight Hex characters to the server Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 202 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 138 Syslog Example continued Jul LG 1L 289390 192 168 102 2 AXELN Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Data 4500003c100100001 010004c0a86614ca849a7p08004a5c020001006162636465666768696a6b6c 6d6e6f 7071727374 JUL 19 11 28456 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL Packet Trigger Protocol l Data 4500002c1b0140001f06b50ec0a86614ca849a7pb0427001700195b3e00000000600220008cd40000 020405b4 Jul 19 11 29006 192 168 10252 ZYXEL Packet Trigger Protocol l Data 45000028240140001f06ac12c0a86614ca849a7pb0427001700195b451d1430135004000077600000 3 Filter Log SdcmdSyslogSend SYSLOG FILLOG SYSLOG NOTICE String String IP Src xx xx xx xx DSt xx xx xX XX prot Spo xxxx dpo xxxx S04 gt RO1mD IP is the packet header and SO4 gt ROlmD means filter set 4 S and rule 1 R match m drop D Src Source Address Dst Destination Address prot Protocol TCP UDP ICMP spo Source port dpo Destination port Jul 19 14 43 55 192J168 102 2 ZYXELS IP 876 202 132 157 123 D050 255 255 255 255 UDP spo 0208 dpo 0208 S03 gt ROIm
27. 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers In this example there are 3 IGAs from our ISP There are many departments but two have their own FTP server All departments share the same router The example will reserve one IGA for each department with an FTP server and all departments use the other IGA Map the FTP servers to the first two IGAs and the other LAN traffic to the remaining IGA Map the third IGA to an inside web server and mail server Four rules need to be configured two bi directional and two unidirectional as follows 1 Map the first IGA to the first inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions 1 1 mapping giving both local and global IP addresses 2 Map the second IGA to our second inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions 1 1 mapping giving both local and global IP addresses 3 Map the other outgoing LAN traffic to IGA3 Many 1 mapping 4 You also map your third IGA to the web server and mail server on the LAN Type Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types to other computers behind NAT on the LAN The example situation looks somewhat like this Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 172 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 106 NAT Example 3 LAN Mapping Rules aa 1 FIP 1 lt gt IGA 1 Type 1 1 y 2 FTP 2 lt gt IGA 2 Type 1 1 Web Sever WS 3 Other LAN traffic gt IGA 3 Type M 1 Outgoing Traffic 192 168 1 21 YP going
28. 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 86 P 660R T Series User s Guide 87 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 8 Dynamic DNS Setup This chapter discusses how to configure your Prestige to use Dynamic DNS 8 1 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This 1s for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 8 1 1 DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS 8 2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To c
29. 88 ee NN PENN EE 88 Chapter 9 DENN ph 90 NN and Dale AN 90 P 660R T Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration rnnxnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnn 92 10 1 Remote Management Overview ENEE 92 10 1 1 Remote Management Limitations rrrnnrrrnnnernnnrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnennnnennnnennnnere 92 10 1 2 Remote Management and NAT rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnenannnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnsnnnnennn 93 10 1 3 SN Nedreaas 93 AT EE EE ER NERE EEE EE REE 93 VIT ea sesso tase TEE 93 E EEE EEE NETTENE NE E 93 10 5 Configuring Remote Management rrrannnnnnnnnnnnannnanennnnnnannnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnsnn 93 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP ernnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnr 96 11 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play rrrnnernnennnrnnnnrnnnennnrnnnrnnnnennnennernnnnnnnnennee 96 TL11 Row do Lknow iim using UPNP se cccsissssnnsiancsarniccdarscanaucnsjescaevedetiavseecads 96 REE GE EEE E ia ni eae 96 TENNER eegene 96 PEN Ga E EEE ER 97 TENT E 97 11 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example 1 ugeuegEEueNENENESENEEESERENERENEESEKNERdENE SSES 98 11 4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example Ls casa ietasddcnamtdecdsamiesaleounamiacedaereulees 101 Chapter 12 ETE ra E A EEEE 108 12 1 Maintenance e Leek akk dann 108 VNR 108 VET NNN Se 110 Eg GE se EEE RE EE ER RE 111 VAN ET WETTER 112 FINN Ae 113 12 5 1 Diagnostic General SEN ende
30. Bridge 69 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 12 VVAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit Refer to the appendix for more information The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VC The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR Variable Bit Rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Cell Rate Cell rate configuration often helps eliminate traffic congestion that slows transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find
31. Connections Network Tasks Internet Connection Disabled h Internet Connection Create new connection Zo Set up home or small office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also Local 4rea Connection A4 Network Troubleshooter Enabled OA Accton ENT207D T POT Fast hi Other Places Lk Control Panel a My Network Places CH My Documents v My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder start Ki Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your Prestige and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 47 Network Connections My Network Places My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help pack hi gt K po Search K Folders Hak Address a My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks ZyXEL Prestige 660R T3 T Internet Sharing Gateway 4 Add network place Ki View network connections Invoke Za Set up home or small office network Create Shortcut wy View workgroup computers Delete Rename Other Places E Properties I Ej Desktop a My Computer My Documents 6 Right click on the icon for your Prestige and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the Prestige Figure 48 Network C
32. For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The Prestige keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 23 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global WAN IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 Er 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 d eg Inside Local Fr Addresses ILA 192 168 1 10 Inside Global Addresses IGA Pitts eet bf ee ee ee 7 1 4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP Alias behind the Prestige can communicate with three distinct WAN networks More examples follow at the end of this chapter Figure 24 NAT Application With IP Alias LAN 192 168 1 X Server In Network Server Admin Network Admin 192 168 1 1 IP 1 IGA 1 Corporation B Corporation A NT Server 1
33. IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case When DHCP is used the following items need to be set Client IP Pool This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Starting Address Size of Client IP This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Pool 63 Chapter 5 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 11 LAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Secondary DNS Server Remote DHCP Server TCP IP IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast As above If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actu
34. LAN and WAN or Disable neither e WAN only Internet e ALL LAN and WAN e LAN only e Disable Neither Note If you enable remote management of a service but have applied a filter to block the service then you will not be able to remotely manage the Prestige using the service Enter 11 from menu 24 to display Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control shown next Chapter 27 Remote Management 224 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 153 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control TELNET S rver Server Port 23 Server Access LAN only Secured Client IP 0 0 0 0 FIP Server Server Port 21 Server Access LAN only Secured Client IP 0 0 0 0 Web Server Server Port 80 Server Access LAN only Secured Client IP 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 71 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Telnet Server Each of these read only labels denotes a service or protocol FTP Server Web Server This field shows the port number for the service or protocol You may change the port number if needed but you must use the same port number to access the Prestige Select the access interface if any by pressing the SPACE BAR Choices are LAN only WAN only All or Disable The default is LAN only Secured Client IP The default 0 0 0 0 allows any client to use this service or protocol to access the P
35. Login My Password and Authen fields are not applicable N A Multiplexing Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the method of multiplexing that your ISP uses either VC based or LLC based When using PPPoE encapsulation type the name of your PPPoE service here eme 1 Type the password used when this remote node calls your Prestige My Login Type the login name assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node My Password Type the password assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node Rem Login Type the login name that this remote node will use to call your Prestige The login name and the Rem Password will be used to authenticate this node Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 144 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 44 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Authen This field sets the authentication protocol used for outgoing calls Options for this field are CHAP PAP Your Prestige will accept either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP accept CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol only PAP accept PAP Password Authentication Protocol only This field determines the protocol used in routing Options are IP and None Bridge When bridging is enabled your Prestige will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node otherwise the packets are discarded Select Yes to enable and No to disable Edit IP Bridge Pre
36. Multiple VCs If you have an equal number or more of VCs than the number of protocols then select RFC 1483 encapsulation and VC based multiplexing 143 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Figure 73 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Active Yes Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based Service Name N A Incoming Rem Login N A Rem Password N A Outgoing My Login N A My Password N A Authen N A P 660R T Series User s Guide Route IP Bridge No Edit IP Bridge No Edit ATM Options No Edit Advance Options N A TEITO Option Allocated Budget min N A Period hr N A Schedule Sets N A Nailed Up Connection N A Session Options Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel In Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile fill in the fields as described in the following table Table 44 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile FIELD DESCRIPTION Rem Node Name Type a unique descriptive name of up to eight characters for this node Active Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to activate or No to deactivate this node Inactive nodes are displayed with a minus sign in SMT menu 11 Encapsulation PPPOA refers to RFC 2364 PPP Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 If RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 of ENET ENCAP are selected then the Rem Login Rem Password My
37. Password x xx Period hr 0 Outgoing Schedules Sets 1 2 3 4 My Login ChangeMe Nailed Up Connection No My Password NACAK Session Options Authen CHAP PAP Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel You can apply up to four schedule sets separated by commas for one remote node Change the schedule set numbers to your preference s Chapter 29 Call Scheduling 240 P 660R T Series User s Guide 241 Chapter 29 Call Scheduling P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 30 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies 30 1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige Table 75 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Prestige PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the Make sure that the Prestige s power adaptor is connected to the Prestige and plugged LEDs turn on in to an appropriate power source Check that the Prestige and the power source are when I turn on both turned on the Prestige Turn the Prestige off and on lf the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should contact your vendor 30 2 Problems with the LAN LED Table 76 Troubleshooting the LAN LED PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The LAN LEDs Check your Ethernet cable connections and type refer to the Quick Start Guide for do not turn on details Check for faulty Ethernet cables Make sure your computer s Ethernet card is working properly Cha
38. Password a Cancel 6 It is highly recommended you change the default password Enter a new password retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now Note If you do not change the password the following screen appears every time you log in Figure 4 Change Password at Login Use this screen to change the password Ve recommend that you personalize the system administrator password by changing it to something besides the default 12354 The administrator password should must be between 1 30 characters New Password Retype to Confirm 7 You should now see the SITE MAP screen Note The Prestige automatically times out after five minutes of inactivity Simply log back into the Prestige if this happens to you 2 2 Resetting the Prestige If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the Prestige to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 41 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 660R T Series User s Guide 2 2 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the PWR SYS LED is on not blinking 2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the PWR SYS LED begins to blink and then release it When the PWR SYS LED begins to
39. Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes after you log in your Prestige will automatically log you out Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT 118 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 58 Login Screen Enter Password 13 1 3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview The following figure gives you an overview of the various SMT menu screens of your Prestige Table 32 SMT Menus Overview wus suB menus DEELER 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options 11 8 Advance Setup Options PPPoE passthrough 12 Static Routing Setup 12 1 IP Static Route 12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route 12 3 Bridge Static Route 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route 15 NAT Setup 15 1 Address Mapping Sets 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules 15 1 1 x Address Mapping Rule 15 2 NAT Server Sets 15 2 x NAT Server Setup 21 Filter Set 21 x Filter Rules Summary 21 x x Generic Filter Rule mn Configuration 21 x x TCP IP Filter Rule 22 SNMP Configuration pp 119 Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 32 SMT Menus Overview continued MENUS SUB MENUS 24 2 System Information and 24 2 1 Information NN Console Port Speed 24 2 2 Change Console Port Speed 243 2uNK Seg ugeet S S 2a 5 Backup Confguaton gt 2aGResoreConfguraton gt 24 7 Upload Firmware 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware 24 7 2 Upload System Configuration File 24 9 Call Control 24 9 1 Budget Management 24 11
40. Prestige rrrrrnrrrnarrranrvanrvnnrrnannnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnen 180 22 3 Filter Rules Summary Menus ssi cocerescnastensatessrannesseicetarsnebsedantznateccensenerectertvents 181 22 4 Configuring a Filter Rule 4Luueemaramesnsmeimnasmeet evidens 182 PV NE ee 182 222 Generne ee TEE 185 ETT Toes anda NAT vet 187 P 660R T Series User s Guide PRS ERE 187 22 7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults A 190 ENTEN 190 22 1 2 PROTOS A EE 190 Chapter 23 SNMP EE EH 192 TEE 192 PE EE ae EEE RE EEE 193 PN essens 193 KE ST al NEE 194 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis rnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnn 196 LEN JP 196 NE NNN 196 RS EES 198 REE Og ER ER 198 FN FON NAG 199 ALT NTN NN 200 24 4 1 Viewing Error LOg EEN 200 LE EE Eee RE A 201 FUNN gege 203 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance cccscccsseeseseesseeeeeeseeeees 206 le TN NNN nen 206 se MEG Es deed 207 25 2 1 Backup Configuration ER 207 25 2 2 Using the FTP Command from the Command me 208 25 2 3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line rrarernnnnnennnnnn 208 29 24 GUl based GE EE SES 209 25 2 5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations cece 209 25 2 6 Backup Configuration Using TR EE 210 SET IF IF Command rue es 210 ERE ME EE kene ee 210 25 3 Restore Configuration EE 211 REE EEE Aia 211 25 3 2 Restore Using FTP Session Example cccccccceecsseeseeeceeeeeeeesaeens 212 25 4 Uploa
41. Primary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Back Finish The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration DESCRIPTION LAN IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default Note If you changed the Prestige s LAN IP address you must use the new IP address if you want to access the web configurator again LAN Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server From the DHCP Server drop down list box select On to allow your Prestige to assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computer systems that support the DHCP client Select Off to disable DHCP server When DHCP server is used set the following items Client IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address Address pool Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Back Click Back to go back to the previous screen Finish Click Finish to save the settings and proceed to the next wizard screen E Chapter 3 Wizard Setup D P 660R T Series User s Guide 3 2 7 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Test The Presti
42. Reach Extended ADSL RE ADSL SRA Seamless Rate Adaptation Auto negotiating rate adaptation ADSL physical connection ATM AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 Multi protocol over AAL5 RFC2684 1483 PPP over ATM AAL5 RFC 2364 PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 RFC 1483 encapsulation over ATM MAC encapsulated routing ENET encapsulation VC based and LLC based multiplexing Up to 8 PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits 1 610 F4 F5 OAM Other Protocol Support PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols DHCP Server Client Relay RIP I RIP Il ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support RFC 1213 IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy UPnP Management Embedded Web Configurator Menu driven SMT System Management Terminal management CLI Command Line Interpreter Remote Management via Telnet or Web SNMP manageable FTP TFTP for firmware downloading configuration backup and restoration Syslog Built in Diagnostic Tools for FLASH memory ADSL circuitry RAM and LAN port Syslog NAT SUA Port Forwarding 1024 NAT sessions Multimedia application PPTP under NAT SUA IPSec passthrough SIP ALG passthrough 255 Appendix A Table 85 Firmware continued Static Routes Other Features Appendix A Product Specifications 16 IP and 4 Bridge Any IP Zero Configuration VC auto hunting Traffic Redirect Dynamic DNS IP Alias IP Policy Routing P 660R T Seri
43. Remote Management Control S 25 IP Routing Policy 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy SS Setup 26 Schedule Setup 26 1 Schedule Set Setup a 13 2 Navigating the SMT Interface The SMT System Management Terminal is the interface that you use to configure your Prestige Several operations that you should be familiar with before you attempt to modify the configuration are listed in the table below Table 33 Navigating the SMT Interface OPERATION KEY STROKE DESCRIPTION Move down to ENTER To move forward to a submenu type in the number of the another menu desired submenu and press ENTER Move up toa ESC Press ESC to move back to the previous menu previous menu Move to a hidden Press SPACE Fields beginning with Edit lead to hidden menus and have a BAR to change default setting of No Press SPACE BAR once to change No No to Yes then to Yes then press ENTER to go to the hidden menu press ENTER Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT 120 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 33 Navigating the SMT Interface OPERATION KEY STROKE DESCRIPTION Move the cursor ENTER or UP Within a menu press ENTER to move to the next field You DOWN arrow can also use the UP DOWN arrow keys to move to the keys previous and the next field respectively When you are at the top of a menu press the UP arrow key to move to the bottom of a menu Entering Type in or press You need to fill in
44. Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default 6 Click OK to close the window Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 250 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 171 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings sc al xl Settings Scripting Ei Active scripting Ch Enable EN D ma Ei Allow paste operations via script CH Disable Geh Enable Prompt Ei Scripting of Jawa applets CH Disable CH Prompt I Leo Mi bb ski a fl Reset custom settings ve bo Medium Reset cane 30 9 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK to close the window 251 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 172 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings CH Disable Enable Font download CH Disable Ch Enable H CH Prompt Ej Microsoft VM Java permissions Custom a Table Jana Geh High safety Low safety Reset custom settings ve Eo Medium Reset cane 30 9 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Chapter 30 T
45. and the subnet mask Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 46 P 660R T Series User s Guide If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the Prestige The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your Prestige but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Prestige will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Prestige unless you are instructed to do otherwise 3 2 1 IP Address Assignment A static IP
46. as number of packets sent and number of packets received for each port 12 2 1 System Statistics Click Show Statistics in the System Status screen to open the following screen Read only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics Also provided are system up time and poll interval s The Poll Interval s field is configurable Figure 50 System Status Show Statistics System up Time 0 36 42 CPU Load 13 04 WAN Port Statistics Link Status Down Upstream Speed 0 kbps Downstream Speed 0 kbps Node Link Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx Bis Rx Bis Up Time 4ENET m o o o o o 160000 LAN Port Statistics Inte face Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Ethernet 100MiF ull Duplex 21 84 1867 0 Poll Intervalis 5 set Interval stop Chapter 12 Maintenance 110 P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen o CH D N LO lt o P D 3 LO P S rop Oo LO F O U pme S D oe O DESCRIPTION System up Time CPU Load LAN or WAN Port Statistics Link Status This is the elapsed time the system has been up This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization This is the WAN or LAN port This is the status of your WAN link Upstream Speed This is the upstream speed of your Prestige Downstream Speed Node Link Thi
47. aware of PPPoE This alleviates the administrator from having to manage the PPPoE clients on the individual computers Figure 201 Prestige as a PPPoE Client Es CR ADSL Access Concentrator ISP CR Ethernet Ethernet fi Appendix G PPPoE P 660R T Series User s Guide PPENDIX H Virtual Circuit Topology ATM is a connection oriented technology meaning that it sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows e Virtual Channel Logical connections between ATM switches e Virtual Path A bundle of virtual channels e Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end point Figure 202 Virtual Circuit Topology virtual circuit firtual channel Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points In an ATM cell header a VPI Virtual Path Identifier identifies a link formed by a virtual path a VCI Virtual Channel Identifier identifies a channel within a virtual path The VPI and VCI identify a virtual path that is termination points between ATM switches A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit Virtual Circuit Topology 294 P 660R T Series User s Guide 295 Virtual Circuit Topology Numerics 110V AC 4 230V AC 4 A AC 4 Accessories 4 Address Assignment 59 Address mapping 84 Address
48. clients the filenames are similar to those seen next Note Only use firmware for your Prestige s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Prestige Ets get rom 0 config efg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file sere eo If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Prestige only recognizes rom 0 and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 206 P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table is a summary Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the Prestige and the external filename refers to the filename not on the Prestige that is on your computer local network or FTP site and so the name but not the extension may vary After uploading new firmware see the ZyNOS F W Version field in Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version The AT command is the command you enter after you press y when prompted in the SMT menu to go into debug mode Table 66 Filename Conventions FILE TYPE INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration Rom 0 This is
49. confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Password LABEL DESCRIPTION C Password Type the password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field Type the new password in this field Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 4 Password Setup 56 P 660R T Series User s Guide 57 Chapter 4 Password Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 5 LAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings 5 1 LAN Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 5 1 1 LANs WANs and the Prestige The actual physical connection determines whether the Prestige ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 15 LAN and WAN IP Addresses RR a a a ce r gl aa rm a aaa a mam ewes rear arr mmm we mm eons p Pid
50. failed WAN interface gets IP s DHCP client IP expired DHCP server assigns s Successful SMT login SMT login failed Successful WEB login WEB login failed Successful TELNET login TELNET login failed Successful FTP login FTP login failed NAT Session Table is Full Starting Connectivity Monitor Time initialized by Daytime Server Time initialized by Time server Time initialized by NTP server Connect to Daytime server fail Connect to Time server fail Connect to NTP server fail Too large ICMP packet has been dropped SMT Session Begin SMT Session End Appendix F Log Descriptions DESCRIPTION The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server PPPoE PPTP or dial up server Someone has logged on to the router s SMT interface Someone has failed to log on to the router s SMT interface Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface Someone has logged on to the router via telnet Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet Someone has logged on to the router via ftp Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full Starting Connectivity Monitor The router got the time and date from the Daytime server The router got the time and date from the time server The router got t
51. firmware and the configuration file using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To backup the configuration file follow the procedure shown next 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter CI mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance 3 Enter command sys stdio 0 to disable the SMT timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five minute SMT timeout default when the file transfer is complete 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer 5 Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer The file name for the configuration file is rom 0 rom zero not capital o Note that the telnet connection must be active and the SMT in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer and binar
52. part of the network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets see Table 86 on page 274 available for subnetting The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 99 Class B Subnet Planning NO HOSTS PER SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 2 2552852240 19 Ia ma ng 2552852520 22 Je mm 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 124 256 254 9 um 1 gt wech wesch O DIN Ses xo x xo es Nr Nr Nr I 255 255 255 240 20 Je e oO 1 Appendix C IP Subnetting 280 P 660R T Series User s Guide 281 Appendix C IP Subnetting P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix D Splitters and Microfilters This appendix tells you how to install a POTS splitter or a telephone microfilter Connecting a POTS Splitter When you use the Full Rate Gdmt ADSL standard you can use a POTS Plain Old Telephone Service splitter to separate the telephone and ADSL signals This allows simultaneous Internet access and telephone service on the same line A splitter also eliminates the destructive interference conditions caused by telephone sets Install the POTS splitter at the point where the telephone line enters your residence as shown in the following figure Figure 197 Connecting a POTS Splitter 1 Connect the side labeled Phone to your telephone 2 Connect the side l
53. set s to apply to the incoming and outgoing traffic between this remote node and the Prestige and also to prevent certain packets from triggering calls You can specify up to 4 filter sets separated by comma for example 1 5 9 12 in each filter field Note that spaces are accepted in this field The Prestige has a prepackaged filter set NetBIOS WAN that blocks NetBIOS packets Include this in the call filter sets if you want to prevent NetBIOS packets from triggering calls to a remote node Figure 76 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters 1 5 9 12 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 148 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 77 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol Filters 1 5 9 12 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Call Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 18 4 1 Web Configurator Internet Security Filter Rules In the web configurator open the Security screen as shown next Select the predefined filter rules and click Apply Figure 78 Internet Security Internet Security Your device provides the following filter rules
54. steps for each default gateway you want to add e Click OK when finished Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 264 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 182 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP e Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es e Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them 265 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 183 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration fou can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 8 Obtain an IF address automatically O Use the following IF address 8 Obtain ONS server address automatically O Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Propertie
55. the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example In Windows click Start Settings and then Control Panel means first click the Start button then point your mouse pointer to Settings and then click Control Panel e g 18 a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words The Prestige 660R Tx P 660R Tx series may be referred to as the Prestige in this user s guide This refers to both models ADSL over POTS and ADSL over ISDN unless specifically identified Related Documentation Preface e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away They contain connection information and instructions on getting started e Web Configurator Online Help 28 P 660R T Series User s Guide 29 Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information e ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Roa
56. the Filter Rules Summary Menu 181 Table 55 Rule Abbreviations Used WER 182 Table 56 Menu 1301 TCP IP Filter EE 183 Table 57 Menu 21 1 5 1 Generic Filter Rule rrrrnrnnnrnnnnnnannnnnrvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennnnen 186 TNT SG Ge 190 Table 59 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration 194 TET been 194 Table 61 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits ccccciesdcverccesavevidivestoserseeudaveiecevindiessivestisereens 195 Table 62 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status 2 0 cccceccseeceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeees 197 Table 63 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information 199 Table 64 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting rrrnrrnrnnenvnnennnnennnn 201 Table 65 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic rrrrrarernnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennne 204 eg eg EE ENE 207 Table 67 General Commands for GUl based FTP Clients rrrranrranennnennnennnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnene 209 Table 68 General Commands for GUl based TFTP Clients rrrurrrannrnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnrnnnennnne 211 Table 69 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management rrrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennre 220 Table 70 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting rrrrorerarennnrnnnrnnnre 221 Table 71 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control rrrrnrennnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennsennnne 225 Table 72 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup saseraemmminiilln edel Red ie e 230 Table 73 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy EE 231 Table 74 Menu 26 1 Schedul
57. the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is 0 cells sec Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 Login Information PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Enter the password associated with the user name above IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below Connection The schedule rule s in SMT menu 26 have priority over your Connection PPPoA and PPPoE settings encapsulation only Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection when you want y
58. the configuration filename on the Prestige Uploading the rom 0 file replaces the entire ROM file system including your Prestige configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware bm on the Prestige 25 2 Backup Configuration Option 5 from Menu 24 System Maintenance allows you to backup the current Prestige configuration to your computer Backup is highly recommended once your Prestige is functioning properly FTP is the preferred methods for backing up your current configuration to your computer since they are faster Any serial communications program should work fine however you must use Xmodem protocol to perform the download upload and you don t have to rename the files Please note that terms download and upload are relative to the computer Download means to transfer from the Prestige to the computer while upload means from your computer to the Prestige 25 2 1 Backup Configuration Follow the instructions as shown in the next screen 207 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 140 Telnet in Menu 24 5 Menu 24 5 System Maintenance Backup Configuration To transfer the configuration file to your workstation follow the procedure below 1 Launch the FTP client on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your Prestige T
59. to access the Internet and the Prestige without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet thus acting as an auxiliary if your regular WAN connection fails Universal Plug and Play UPnP Using the standard TCP IP protocol the Prestige and other UPnP enabled devices can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network PPPoE Support RFC2516 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPoE driver on the Prestige is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers Network Address Translation NAT Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P 660R T Series User s Guide 10 100M Auto negotia
60. two types of fields The first requires you to information SPACE BAR type in the appropriate information The second allows you to then press cycle through the available choices by pressing SPACE BAR ENTER Required fields lt gt or All fields with the symbol lt gt must be filled in order to be able ChangeMe to save the new configuration All fields with ChangeMe must not be left blank in order to be able to save the new configuration N A fields lt N A gt Some of the fields in the SMT will show a lt N A gt This symbol refers to an option that is Not Applicable Save your ENTER Save your configuration by pressing ENTER at the message configuration Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel Saving the data on the screen will take you in most cases to the previous menu Make sure you save your settings in each screen that you configure Exit the SMT Type 99 then press ENTER Type 99 at the main menu prompt and press ENTER to exit the SMT interface After you enter the password the SMT displays the main menu as shown next Table 34 SMT Main Menu Copyright co 1994 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp Prestige 660R T3 T7 Main Menu Getting Started Advanced Management 1 General Setup 21 Filter Set Configuration 2 WAN Backup Setup 22 ONME Configuration 3 LAN Setup 23 System Password 4 Internet Access Setup 24 System Maintenance 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Advanced Applications 26 Sched
61. typing help or at the command prompt Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished Figure 147 Command Mode in Menu 24 Menu 24 System Maintenance System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode e Call Control O Time and Date Setting 1 Remote Management Lx ds cP 4 or CS 8 J 1 d Enter Menu Selection Number Figure 148 Valid Commands Copyright c 1994 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp Fase Valid commands are sys exit device ether wan poe ip ppp bridge hdap ras gt Chapter 26 System Maintenance 218 P 660R T Series User s Guide 26 2 Call Control Support Call Control Support is only applicable when Encapsulation is set to PPPoE in menu 4 or menu I 1 1 The budget management function allows you to set a limit on the total outgoing call time of the Prestige within certain times When the total outgoing call time exceeds the limit the current call will be dropped and any future outgoing calls will be blocked To access the call control menu select option 9 in menu 24 to go to Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control as shown in the next table Figure 149 Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control 1 Budget Management Enter Menu Selection Number 26 2 1 Budget Management Menu
62. which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS 67 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 18 Example of Traffic Shaping TU cr T O i H PCR EE EET ta tie SCR Hee EE i lt gt p Time MBS MBS 6 5 Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you turn on and connect the Prestige to a telephone jack it automatically detects the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes In cases where additional account information s
63. 0 0 0 0 12 O O 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 21 5 4 Example 4 NAT Unfriendly Application Programs 175 Some applications do not support NAT Mapping using TCP or UDP port address translation In this case it is better to use Many to Many No Overload mapping as port numbers do not change for Many to Many No Overload and One to One NAT mapping types The following figure illustrates this Figure 111 NAT Example 4 Mapping Rules A 192 168 1 33 A B C lt gt IGAS 1 2 3 Type Many toMany No Overload Inter net I 3IGAs 10 132 50 1 IGA1 10 132 50 2 IGA2 10 132 50 3 IGA3 Other applications such as some gaming programs are NAT unfriendly because they embed addressing information in the data stream These applications won t work through NAT even when using One to One and Many to Many No Overload mapping types Follow the steps outlined in example 3 to configure these two menus as follows Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 112 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type Many to Many No Overload Local IP Start 192 168 1 10 End 192 168 1 12 Global IP Start 10 132 50 1 End 10 132 50 3 Server Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel After you ve configured your rule you should be able to check the settings in menu 15 1 1 as shown next Fi
64. 11 Remote Node Setup Menu 11 Remote Node Setup MyISP ISP SUA Enter Node to Edit 18 2 2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios For Internet access you should use the encapsulation and multiplexing methods used by your ISP Consult your telephone company for information on encapsulation and multiplexing methods for LAN to LAN applications for example between a branch office and corporate headquarters There must be prior agreement on encapsulation and multiplexing methods because they cannot be automatically determined What method s you use also depends on how many VCs you have and how many different network protocols you need The extra overhead that ENET ENCAP encapsulation entails makes it a poor choice in a LAN to LAN application Here are some examples of more suitable combinations in such an application 18 2 2 1 Scenario 1 One VC Multiple Protocols PPPoA RFC 2364 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing is the best combination because no extra protocol identifying headers are needed The PPP protocol already contains this information 18 2 2 2 Scenario 2 One VC One Protocol IP Selecting RFC 1483 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing requires the least amount of overhead 0 octets However if there is a potential need for multiple protocol support in the future it may be safer to select PPPoA encapsulation instead of RFC 1483 so you do not need to reconfigure either computer later 18 2 2 3 Scenario 3
65. 113 12 5 2 Diagnostic DSL Line Screen suuemmemmaessemneamenlev dato 114 126 AE eo EEE EEE EEE 115 Chapter 13 fr dg Beg EE REE eels 118 SP R 118 13 1 1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet rrrrrranrnnarrrnneranrvnnrnnnnnn 118 ER Syr ae ERE ERE TE RE EE 118 13 1 3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview r rrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnanenanennnnnnnnee 119 13 2 Navigating the SMT Interface ET EE 120 13 2 1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary ccccce cece eee 122 13 3 Changing the System Password wees ccicccasceiasscaascinassaassavaorsdaiecconswsanaduassenancsaads 122 P 660R T Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Menu 1 G noral SOEU EN 124 EE Es EE 124 14 2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1 ten egen ett ga 124 14 2 1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS rrrrnrnnnnennrnnrnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnn 125 Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup rerernnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnee 128 15 1 Introduction to WAN Backup Setup ccccccccseeeceeeceeeceeeaesesseeseeeeaeeseeeess 128 15 2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu EE 128 RE Ge EEE 129 Chapter 16 MANN en 132 EN EO EEN 132 16 1 1 General Ethernet EN 132 16 2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup rrrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnrnnnnnnanrnannnnnrnnnnnn 133 16 3 SOP Ethemet SANN NL Len 133 Chapter 17 Tee ET EE AA AA ANE PEENE N A E 136 17 1 Internet Access Overview rrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnenanrnnnnnnanenan
66. 12 25 4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files This section shows you how to upload firmware and configuration files You can upload configuration files by following the procedure in Section 25 2 on page 207 or by following the instructions in Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File Note Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may permanently damage your Prestige 25 4 1 Firmware File Upload FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client When you telnet into the Prestige you will see the following screens for uploading firmware and the configuration file using FTP Figure 144 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware Menu 24 7 1 System Maintenance Upload System Firmware To upload the system firmware follow the procedure below Launch the FTP client on your workstation Type open and the IP address of your system Then type root and SMT password as requested Type put firmware filename ras where firmwarefilename is the name of your firmware upgrade file on your workstation and ras is the remote file name on the system The system reboots automatically after a successful firmware upload For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP note that you must remain on this menu to upload syst
67. 1334 e PPP over CHAP RFC 1994 Protocol Support e DHCP Support DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows the individual clients computers to obtain the TCP IP configuration at start up from a centralized DHCP server The Prestige has built in DHCP server capability enabled by default It can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to DHCP clients The Prestige can now also act as a surrogate DHCP server DHCP Relay where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 34 P 660R T Series User s Guide 35 IP Alias IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network IP Policy Routing IPPR Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I RIP II IGMP Proxy ICMP support ATM QoS support MIB II support RFC 1213 Networking Compatibility Your Pres
68. 2 Enter Filter Set Number to Configure 0 The following figures display the filter rules in filter sets 11 and 12 Figure 80 Menu 21 11 WebSet 11 Menu 21 11 Filter Rules Summary Filter Rules Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 co Configure Figure 81 Menu 21 12 WebSet 12 Menu 21 12 Filter Rules Summary Filter Rules sd 0 0 0 0 DP 23 SA 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 21 Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 69 Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 80 Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 150 P 660R T Series User s Guide Note Do not edit filter sets 11 and 12 They are used exclusively by the web configurator Any rules you configured in sets 11 and 12 will be erased and replaced when you apply the web configurator generated filter rules 18 5 Editing ATM Layer Options Follow the steps shown next to edit Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options In menu 11 1 move the cursor to the Edit ATM Options field and then press SPACE BAR to select Yes Press ENTER to display Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options There are two versions of menu 11 6 for the Prestige depending on whether you chose VC based LLC based multiplexing and PPP encapsulation in menu 11 1 18 5 1 VC based Multiplexing non PPP Encapsulation For VC based multiplexing by prior agreement a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 will carry IP Separate VPI and VCI numbers m
69. 24 9 1 shows the budget management statistics for outgoing calls Enter 1 from Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control to bring up the following menu Figure 150 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management Remote Node Connection Time Total Budget Elapsed Time Total Period No Budget No Budget Reset Node 0 to update screen 219 Chapter 26 System Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide The total budget is the time limit on the accumulated time for outgoing calls to a remote node When this limit is reached the call will be dropped and further outgoing calls to that remote node will be blocked After each period the total budget is reset The default for the total budget is 0 minutes and the period is 0 hours meaning no budget control You can reset the accumulated connection time in this menu by entering the index of a remote node Enter 0 to update the screen The budget and the reset period can be configured in menu 11 1 for the remote node when PPPoE encapsulation is selected Table 69 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management DESCRIPTION Remote Node Enter the index number of the remote node you want to reset just one in this case Connection Time Total This is the total connection time that has gone by within the allocated Budget budget that you set in menu 11 1 Elapsed Time Total Period The period is the time cycle in hours that the alloc
70. 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min N A Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 My WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Metric 2 Private No RIP Direction None Version RIP 1 Multicast None IP Polici s Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL The next table explains fields in Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Table 45 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options FIELD DESCRIPTION IP Address Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Dynamic if the remote node is using Assignment a dynamically assigned IP address or Static if it is using a static fixed IP address You will only be able to configure this in the ISP node also the one you configure in menu 4 all other nodes are set to Static Rem IP Addr This is the IP address you entered in the previous menu Rem Subnet Type the subnet mask assigned to the remote node Mask of your Prestige NOTE Refers to local Prestige address not the remote router address NAT Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige Select SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige The SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 menu 15 1 see Figure 96 on page 165 Select None to disable NAT My WAN Addr Some implementations especially UNIX derivatives
71. 3 Click Apply to save this setting 247 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 660R T Series User s Guide 30 9 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 168 Internet Options Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet Zen Zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without pour implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 248 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 169 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list be
72. 4 147 RIPSee Routing Information Protocol 60 Risk 4 Risks 4 romfile 206 Routing 136 Routing Information Protocol 60 Direction 60 Version 60 Routing Policy 228 S Sample IP Addresses 147 P 660R T Series User s Guide Schedule Sets Duration 239 SCRSee Sustain Cell Rate 140 Server 79 164 166 168 169 171 172 221 Server behind NAT 168 Service 4 5 Service Personnel 4 Service Type 244 Services 80 setup a schedule 239 Shock Electric 4 Single User Account SUA 37 SMT Menu Overview 119 SMTP 80 SNMP 81 Community 194 Configuration 193 Get 193 GetNext 193 Manager 192 MIBs 193 Set 193 Trap 193 Trusted Host 194 SOHO Small Office Home Office 37 Source Based Routing 228 Spain Contact Information 6 Splitters 282 Static route 154 Static Routing Topology 154 SUA 79 81 SUA Single User Account 79 162 SUA server 80 82 Default server set 80 SUA vs NAT 79 SUA NAT Server Set 83 Subnet Mask 46 60 134 146 156 199 Subnet Masks 275 Subnetting 275 Supply Voltage 4 Support E mail 6 Supporting Disk 28 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 70 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 67 Sweden Contact Information 6 Swimming Pool 4 Syntax Conventions 28 Syslog 201 Syslog IP Address 201 Syslog Server 201 System Console Port Speed 199 300 P 660R T Series User s Guide Diagnostic 203 Log and Trace 200 Syslog and Accounting 201 System Information 198 System Status 196 System Information 198 S
73. 40 default user name and password 40 Denmark Contact Information 6 Device Filter rules 187 Device rule 187 DHCP 34 52 60 88 111 134 199 DHCP client 34 DHCP relay 34 DHCP server 34 111 134 DHCP table 111 diagnostic 113 Diagnostic Tools 196 DNS 134 Domain Name 59 80 domain name 124 Domain Name System 59 DSL Digital Subscriber Line 30 DSL line reinitialize 115 DSL What Is It 30 DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer 36 Dust 4 Dynamic DNS 34 88 125 dynamic DNS 34 125 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 34 DYNDNS Wildcard 88 E ECHO 80 Electric Shock 4 Electrical Pipes 4 Electrocution 4 embedded help 42 Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP 44 Encapsulation 35 44 140 143 ENET ENCAP 44 PPP over Ethernet 44 PPPoA 44 RFC 1483 45 297 encapsulation 35 Error Log 200 Ethernet 255 Europe 4 Exposure 4 F Factory LAN Defaults 60 faulty Ethernet cables 242 Filename Conventions 206 filename conventions 207 Filter 132 178 Applying Filters 190 Ethernet Traffic 190 Ethernet traffic 190 Filter Rules 181 Filter structure 179 Generic Filter Rule 185 Remote Node 148 Remote Node Filter 148 Remote Node Filters 190 Sample 189 SUA 187 TCP IP Filter Rule 182 Filter Log 203 Filter Rule Process 179 Filter Rule Setup 182 Filter Set Class 182 Filtering 178 182 Filtering Process Outgoing Packets 178 Finger 80 Finland Contact Information 6 firmware 115 206 up
74. 68 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 94 Subnet 2 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 IP Address Binary 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 41000000 Table 95 Subnet 3 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Appendix C IP Subnetting 278 Table 96 Subnet 4 TE BT VALE IP Address Binary 41000000 Subnet Mask Binary 41000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create 8 subnets 001 010 011 100 101 110 The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 97 Eight Subnets BROADCAST ADDRESS SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 98 Class C Subnet Planning NO HOSTS PER 255 255 255 128 25 126 emeng J eooo 279 Appendix C IP Subnetting P 660R T Series User s Guide Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are
75. 9 AE Connection pew Eet nee et eee neo ee ice ie een rn 104 Figure 46 Network Connections siaapcerecersicnacrscedanian onmcauneseinceesentensundaansrmicapeveenadedimenmeneaneneds 105 Figure 47 Network Connections My Network Places rrarrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 106 Figure 48 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example 00 106 Figure 49 System Status EEN 109 Figure 50 System Status SNOW SAS EE 110 POU E Ae tee 112 FUGER RE TR RE TE 112 FOUG S3 NE GN ME 113 FR gl DSL LINO ENE EE iias oiii naii 114 Foure 59 Firmware EE geed e de ee 116 Figure 56 Network Temporarily Disconnected AA 116 Figure 57 Error Message RE ER NN gies 117 Le EE EE 119 Figure 59 Menu 23 Change Password rnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnennnsnnnnenne 122 Figure 60 Menu 1 General Setup NEEN 125 Figure 61 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS asseeenee eden teers 126 Figure 62 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Luanenemdtenasmieiavmddesekvmjuunidaksvhvs Edge 128 Figure 63 Menu 2 1Traffic Redirect Setup rarrrnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnennnenne 130 Foure te honi o LAN SOND EE 132 Figure 65 Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup rrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 132 Figure 66 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Abu 133 Figure 67 IP Alias Network Example EE eed ies aes 137 Figure 66 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup sussmesasiseimaresmei
76. 92 168 1 1 ES KE i Server In Sales Network P IGA LANZ 192 168 2 4 LI Network Server AA 1 I ee Sales 192 168 2 1 NT Server 192 168 2 1 LJ AS i Server In LANS 192 168 3 X R op HoH Network Server gt L r R amp D 192 168 3 1 WAN Addresses LAN Address es Default IPs NT Server 7 E gt 192 168 1 1 192 168 3 1 GAJ gt 192 168 2 1 IGA Seo gt 192 168 3 1 7 1 5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP port mapping They are Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 78 P 660R T Series User s Guide e One to One In One to One mode the Prestige maps one local IP address to one global IP address e Many to One In Many to One mode the Prestige maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA for instance PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported the SUA Only option in today s routers e Many to Many Overload In Many to Many Overload mode the Prestige maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses e Many to Many No Overload In Many to Many No Overload mode the Prestige maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address e Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to t
77. ATE DUE TO The uploaded file was not accepted by the router Back 117 Chapter 12 Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 13 Introducing the SMT This chapter explains how to access and navigate the System Management Terminal and gives an overview of its menus 13 1 SMT Introduction The Prestige s SMT System Management Terminal is a menu driven interface that you can access from a terminal emulator over a telnet connection This chapter shows you how to access the SMT System Management Terminal menus via Telnet how to navigate the SMT and how to configure SMT menus 13 1 1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet The following procedure details how to telnet into your Prestige 1 In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 1 1 the default IP address and click OK 2 Enter 1234 in the Password field 3 After entering the password you will see the main menu Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes default timeout period after you log in your Prestige will automatically log you out You will then have to telnet into the Prestige again 13 1 2 Entering Password The login screen appears after you press ENTER prompting you to enter the password as shown next For your first login enter the default password 1234 As you type the password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type
78. C 1483 DESCRIPTION IP Address This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field Network Address Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop down list box Refer to Translation Chapter 7 on page 76 for more details Back Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen Figure 9 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access IP Address Ce Obtain an IP Address Automatically O Static IP Address IF Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mack 0 0 0 0 EMET EMCAP Gateway 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 50 P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP DESCRIPTION IP Address A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to Appendix C on page 274 to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting ENET ENCAP You must specify a gateway IP addr
79. Client IP Pool 32 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction Both Version RIP 1 Multicast None IP Policies 2 4 7 9 Edit IP Alias No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Go to menu 11 3 shown next and type the number s of the IP Routing Policy set s as appropriate You can cascade up to four policy sets by typing their numbers separated by commas Figure 158 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min 0 Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 My WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT Full Feature Address Mapping Set 2 Metric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B Multicast IGMP v2 IP Policies 2 4 7 9 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 28 6 IP Policy Routing Example If a network has both Internet and remote node connections you can route Web packets to the Internet using one policy and route FTP packets to a remote network using another policy See the next figure 233 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing P 660R T Series User s Guide Route 1 represents the default IP route and route 2 represents the configured IP route Figure 159 Example of IP Policy Routing w dee Pa raf Vi A WAN Router 192 168 1 100 To force packets
80. E Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPPoE option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius One of the benefits of PPPoE 1s the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the Prestige rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the Prestige does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access 6 4 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at
81. EEE 56 Chapter 5 EE OT RE EE EE EE ane 58 BEE EE EE 58 5 1 1 LANs WANS and the Prestige rrrnrrnarrnnrranenannnnrnanenannnnnnanennrnnnrnanennnnnene 58 9 2 DNS e e EEE 59 5 3 DNS Server Address Assignment ENNEN 59 SITT 60 9 4 1 Factory SED EEE ENE 60 5 4 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask E 60 oA E 60 P 660R T Series User s Guide ETE RE NE 61 EE EE NE EE ENN 61 TN VS 62 FN 63 Chapter 6 LET EEE EN RENERE 66 SEE ER EE EN EE EN 66 METT H 66 PP EFN se 67 ETE EE idee ieee 67 6 5 Zero Configuration Internet ACCESS rrarrrnnnnnrnnnenannnernnnrnannnnennnnnaneneennnennanneenneee 68 6 6 Configuring WAN Setup EE 68 Ke FREE eege 71 GO NNN RNA 72 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT ScreenS rr nnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennn 76 PTE Agence aa eden stent ees es see es ae ene 76 hT NADEVOM SN 76 te What NAT TEE if PEN O EE E a 77 REN Te LEE 78 A19 NAT Mapping TYDES ERE ERE EEE 78 7 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT egen sites beten breet eeneg 79 NNN eerste eat prince varies ceeds ER 80 70 1 Default Server IP Address tege ET et KEEN ENEE Egeter 80 7 3 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers 80 7 3 3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA Example cccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 81 RT ee TONAT NOUE EEE EE 81 ent El 82 1 6 Configuring Address Mapping EE 84 Fok Editing an Address Mapping Rule eet 85 Chapter 8 Dynami ee 88 ey Dynami DNS Sene 88 Be ee ARC WEE
82. F Jul 19 14 44 00 192 168 102 2 ZYKXEL IP Sr6 192 1684102 20 Dst 202 132 154 1 UDP spo 05d4 dpo 0035 S03 gt ROImF Jul 19 14444004 192 1684102 2 ZY XE IP Sro 192 168 102 20 DSst 202 132 1541 UDP spo 05d4 dpo 0035 S03 gt ROImF ch PPP LOG SdemdsSysl gs nd SYSLOG PPPLOG SYSLOG NOTICE String String gt ppo Proto Starting pppiProto Opening 7 popiProto Closing ppp Pr to Shutdown Proto LCP ATCP BACP BCP CBCP CCP CHAP PAP IPCP IPXCP JUL 19 11 42 44 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL ppo LOP Closing Jul 19 11 42 49 192 168 10242 ZYXEL PPpi LPCOP lt Closing JUL 19 11342554 1927 168 102 2 ZYXEL ppo CCP Closing 24 5 Diagnostic The diagnostic facility allows you to test the different aspects of your Prestige to determine if it is working properly Menu 24 4 allows you to choose among various types of diagnostic tests to evaluate your system as shown in the following figure Follow the procedure next to get to Diagnostic 1 From the main menu type 24 to open Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 From this menu type 4 Diagnostic to open Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic 203 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 139 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic xDSL System 1 Reset xDSL 21 Reboot System 22 Command Mode TCP IP 12 Ping Host Enter Menu Selection Number Host IP Addres
83. Foure 107 Menot SUNN E 247 FORT NNN rene e 248 Figure 169 Pop up Blocker Settings ege naien 249 Figure 170 Internet Options ET 250 Figure 171 Security Settings Java Scripting M 251 Figure 172 Security Settings TEE 252 FOT INN 253 Figure 174 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration cccccsccceseceeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeees 259 Figure 175 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address rrrrrnnrnnnnrnrnrnnnrnrnnrrnnnnnre 260 Figure 176 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration rrrnrrnnnannnnnnnnrn 261 Figure 177 Windows AF Start Menu EE 262 Figure 178 Windows XP Control Panel Luussmskenerneeenmenrjis mmieivneidvssbnnedes 262 Figure 179 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties 263 Figure 180 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties rrrrnrrrnrrrarrvannnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 263 Figure 181 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties rrrrnnrrrnnnnrnrnnnrrvnnrrrnnnnrr 264 Figure 182 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties cccccscccsscceseecseeseeeseeeeeeeeees 265 Figure 183 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties rrrrrnnrrrnnnrrnrnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnrr 266 Figure 184 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu rrrnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnennnnnnnnennn 267 FNS NPF Leed 267 Figure 186 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu ccccceeccseecceeeceeeceecasecaeecueeaueseseeseeeseeesas 268 ee NOWO soneria aiaa 269 Figure 188 Red H
84. IGMP v2 IP Policies Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following figures show how to configure the first rule 173 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 108 Example 3 Menu 15 1 1 1 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type One to One Local IP Start 192 168 1 10 End N A Global IP Start 10 132 50 1 End N A Server Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Figure 109 Example 3 Final Menu 15 1 1 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name Example3 Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP 192 168 1 10 10 132 50 1 192 168 1 11 10 132 50 2 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 10 132 50 3 10 132 50 3 1 2 3 4 ef 6 7 8 9 O 1 Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Now configure the IGA3 to map to our web server and mail server on the LAN 1 Enter 15 from the main menu 2 Enter 2 in Menu 15 NAT Setup 3 Enter 1 in Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sets to see the following menu Configure it as shown Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 174 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 110 Example 3 Menu 15 2 1 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No End Port No IP Address 1 Default Default 0 0 0 0 2 80 80 192 168 1 21 3 25 25 192 168 1 20 4 O O 0 0 0 0 D O 0 0 0 0 Gr O O 0 0 0 0 Va O O 0 0 0 0 8 O O S KR ae 9 O O 0 0 0 0 10 O O 0040 L O O
85. IP Static Route Setup 155 L LAN 197 LAN Setup 58 66 LAN TCP IP 60 LEDs 242 Lightning 4 Link type 197 Liquids Corrosive 4 LLC based Multiplexing 151 Log and Trace 200 Log Facility 201 Logging Option 184 186 Logical networks 136 Login 144 MAC Media Access Control 112 MAC address 160 Main Menu 121 maintenance 108 management idle timeout period 41 Management Information Base MIB 193 Maximum Burst Size MBS 67 70 298 P 660R T Series User s Guide MBSSee Maximum Burst Size 140 MDI MDI X 34 Media Access Control 158 Message Logging 200 Metric 66 147 156 Multicast 61 147 Multiplexing 35 45 140 143 multiplexing 35 45 LLC based 45 VC based 45 Multiprotocol Encapsulation 45 My WAN Address 146 N Nailed Up Connection 48 NAT 47 80 81 187 Address mapping rule 85 Application 78 Applying NAT in the SMT Menus 162 Configuring 164 Definitions 76 Examples 170 How it works 77 Mapping Types 78 Non NAT Friendly Application Programs 175 Ordering Rules 167 What it does 77 What NAT does 77 NAT Network Address Translation 76 NAT mode 82 NAT Traversal 96 navigating the web configurator 42 Network Address Translation 141 Network Address Translation NAT 33 162 Network Management 35 81 NNTP 81 North America 4 North America Contact Information 6 Norway Contact Information 6 O Opening 4 299 P Packet Error 197 Received 197 Transmitted 197 Packet Triggered 202
86. K ar Deg re ppm pm pm pm ro pp ER Jie JV Je JV Am mmm Ge Fi VJ VE rm Je VM VER R a gi wenn emmeenm renere The interface to EES the LAN is Ethernet NY i gt WAN ege Internet Posse e interface to the Internet ora T remote node is the DSL port La ei eg eg rn Aaa mmm E E ER TETTE VENNA a Chapter 5 LAN Setup 58 P 660R T Series User s Guide 5 2 DNS Server Address DNS Domain Name System is for mapping domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it The DNS server addresses that you enter in the DHCP setup are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The first is for an ISP to tell a customer the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when s he signs up If your ISP gives you the DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen otherwise leave them blank Some ISP s choose to pass the DNS servers using the DNS server extensions of PPP IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation The Prestige supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature
87. LAH Information MAC Address 00 13 49 00 00 01 IF Address 192 168 1 1 IF Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server DHGP Start IP 192 168 1 33 DHCP Pool Size 32 Show Statistics The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 25 System Status LABEL DESCRIPTION System Status System Name This is the name of your Prestige It is for identification purposes ZyNOS Firmware This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date the firmware was created Version ZyNOS is ZyXEL s proprietary Network Operating System design Chapter 12 Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 25 System Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway VPI VCI This is the WAN port IP subnet mask This is the IP address of the default gateway if applicable This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the first Wizard screen LAN Information MAC Address This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your Prestige IP Address This is the LAN port IP address IP Subnet Mask This is the LAN port IP subnet mask DHCP This is the WAN port DHCP role Server Relay not all Prestige models or None DHCP Start IP DHCP Pool Size Show Statistics This is the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool This is the number of IP addresses in the IP address pool Click Show Statistics to see the performance statistics such
88. N access If you changed the Prestige s LAN IP address then enter the new one as the URL Remove any filters in SMT menu 3 1 LAN or menu 11 5 WAN that block web service See also Section 30 8 on page 245 See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed You may also need to clear your Internet browser s cache In Internet Explorer click Tools and then Internet Options to open the Internet Options screen In the General tab click Delete Files In the pop up window select the Delete all offline content check box and click OK Click OK in the Internet Options screen to close it If you disconnect your computer from one device and connect it to another device that has the same IP address your computer s ARP Address Resolution Protocol table may contain an entry that maps the management IP address to the previous device s MAC address In Windows use arp d at the command prompt to delete all entries in your computer s ARP table 30 9 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 30 9 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to
89. P 660R T Series ADSL2 Ethernet Gateway User s Guide ZyXEL P 660R T Series User s Guide Copyright Copyright 2005 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 2 P 660R T Series User s Guide Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not c
90. PIs VCls before you begin this test The Prestige sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the Prestige The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network Upstream Noise Click this button to display the upstream noise margin Margin Downstream Click this button to display the downstream noise margin Noise Margin Click this button to go back to the main Diagnostic screen 12 6 Firmware Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension for example Prestige bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot See Chapter 25 on page 206 in the parts that document the SMT for upgrading firmware using FTP TFTP commands Note Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your device Click Firmware to open the following screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige 115 Chapter 12 Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 55 Firmware Upgrade FIRMWARE Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN Upgrade file and click UPLOAD File Path Browse Upload CONFIGURATION FILE Click Reset to clear all user defined configu
91. Packets 197 PAP 145 Password 56 118 122 144 193 password 118 243 Peak Cell Rate PCR 67 70 Ping 204 Pipes 4 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 44 Point to Point 30 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 81 policy based routing 228 Pool 4 POP3 81 Port Numbers 80 power 242 Power Adaptor 4 Power Cord 4 Power Outlet 4 Power Supply 4 Power Supply repair 4 PPP Encapsulation 151 PPP Log 203 PPP session over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 44 PPPoA 143 PPPoE 67 292 Benefits 67 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 33 67 PPPoE pass through 153 PPTP 81 Precedence 228 231 Private 147 156 Protocol 183 Protocol filter 187 Protocol Filter Rules 187 PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit 44 Q Qualified Service Personnel 4 Quality of Service 228 Quick Start Guide 28 R RAS 199 229 Rate Receiving 197 Transmission 197 Regular Mail 6 reinitialize the ADSL line 115 Related Documentation 28 Remote DHCP Server 134 remote management 245 Remote Management and NAT 93 Remote Management Limitations 92 225 Remote Management Setup 224 Remote Node 142 197 Remote Node Profile 144 Remote Node Setup 142 Remote node 142 Remote Node Index Number 197 Removing 4 Repair 4 Required fields 121 Reset button the 42 resetting the Prestige 42 Restore Configuration 211 RFC 1483 45 RFC 1631 76 RFC 1483 143 RFC 2364 143 144 RFC2516 33 RIP 13
92. R 282 Hs ag GT ER EEE ENE 282 Telephone Microfilters Lae eikkek animeen 282 P 660R T Series User s Guide ET EE EE EN 283 Appendix E Command EE EEN 286 GE EEE EG ER 286 NN NN ee 286 Appendix F NN re 288 Appendix G PFO geed 292 EPP EN NR 292 PN TT Fj tanned tert Peter Sete pin E Per ee torre seen E eer en ene het One enn er ree 292 TN NNN 292 FFR NNN 293 ETE ag GE EN 293 Appendix H Ved GO NON eee 294 DEE 296 P 660R T Series User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Prestige Internet Access Application rrrrnrnnnnnrannrnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnnnnenanennnnrnnennnnenanennn 37 Figure 2 Prestige LAN to LAN Application KEREN 37 Figure 3 Fassword EIERE pareser GASSEN 41 Figure 4 Change Password at Login 2umsmeemnaemeeliainmimeeerembkse ek dE v kivarnbiny pakten DEE NasE 41 Figure 5 Web Configurator Site Map Screen sicceercesescssnessexsdvvestieoiarecdaseicessesbiniaeesstusevereus 42 Figure 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen ENEE 46 Figure 7 Internet Connection with PPPOE EE 49 Figure 8 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 EE 50 Figure 9 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP 50 Figure 10 Internet Connection with PPPOA gedet deeg Big 51 Figure 11 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen ENEE 53 Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration 54 Figure 13 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Tests cccceccseeeceeeceeeseeeeeseeees 55 GE lda o EE E A E IA AI O 56 Figure 15 LAN and WAN IP Ad
93. R T Series User s Guide 10 1 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled e Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 10 1 3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen 1s polling 10 2 Telnet You can configure your Prestige for remote Telnet access as shown next Figure 32 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network gt Z i i dk CS S Yes Internet u M e re f d User telnets into Incoming Traffic the LAN 10 3 FTP You can upload and download Prestige firmware and configuration files using FTP To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client 10 4 Web You can use the Prestige s embedded web configurator for configuration and file management See the online help for details 10 5 Configuring Remote Management Click Remote Management to open the following screen 93 Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 33 Remote Management Remote Management Control Server Type Access Status Port Secured Client IP Telnet Ja dP pooo Feste ww RE P Apply Cancel The fo
94. Resolution Protocol ARP 62 ADSL what is it 30 ADSLstandards 32 Airflow 4 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 276 American Wire Gauge 4 Any IP 33 61 How it works 62 Any IP Setup 64 Any IP table 112 applicaions Internet access 36 AT command 207 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 44 ATM layer options 151 Authentication 145 Authentication protocol 145 auto Crossover 34 auto negotiation 34 AWG 4 B Backup 207 Backup Typ 73 Basement 4 Bridging 145 158 P 660R T Series User s Guide Index Ether Address 160 Ethernet 158 Ethernet Addr Timeout 160 Remote Node 158 Static Route Setup 160 bridging 125 Budget Management 219 C Cables Connecting 4 Call filtering 178 Call filters Built in 178 User defined 178 Call Scheduling 238 Maximum Number of Schedule Sets 238 PPPoE 240 Precedence 238 Precedence Example 238 CBR Continuous Bit Rate 70 CDR 202 CDR Call Detail Record 201 change password at login 41 Collision 197 Command Interpreter Mode 218 Community 193 compact 36 compact guide 40 Computer Name 124 Conditions that prevent TFTP and FTP from working over WAN 209 Configuration 52 111 configuration file 206 Connecting Cables 4 console session 246 Corrosive Liquids 4 Cost Of Transmission 147 156 Country Code 199 Covers 4 CPU Load 198 296 P 660R T Series User s Guide Customer Support 6 D Damage 4 Dampness 4 Danger 4 Data Filtering 178 default LAN IP address
95. See Appendix C on page 274 for more information Gateway IP Address Type the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Type a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Private This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and is not included in RIP broadcasts If No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 19 Static Route Setup 156 P 660R T Series User s Guide 157 Chapter 19 Static Route Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Bridging Setup This chapter shows you how to configure the bridging parameters of your Prestige 20 1 Bridging in General Bridging bases the forwarding decision on the MAC Media Access Control or hardware address while routing does it
96. The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C You want to have two separate networks Divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 Appendix C IP Subnetting 276 P 660R T Series User s Guide Note In the following charts shaded bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to form network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet Table 91 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 92 Subnet2 ae TE BIT VALUE IP Address Binary 40000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 The remaining 7 bits determine the number o
97. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address Note If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup you must configure at least one IP address here When using a WAN backup connection the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection if configured if there is no response Type the number of times 2 recommended that your Prestige may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection or a different WAN backup connection When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection usually a WAN backup connection it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection Type the number of seconds 30 recommended for the Prestige to wait between checks Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic Chapter 6 WAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 13 WAN Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Timeout Type the number of seconds 3 recommended for your Prestige to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check WAN IP Address field before timing out the request The WAN connection is considered down after the Prestige times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested Ac
98. User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Diagnostic General LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection Address Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered Reset System Click this button to reboot the Prestige A warning dialog box is then displayed asking you if you re sure you want to reboot the system Click OK to proceed Back Click this button to go back to the main Diagnostic screen 12 5 2 Diagnostic DSL Line Screen Click Diagnostic and then DSL Line to open the screen shown next Figure 54 Diagnostic DSL Line Diagnostic DSL Line Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F V Reset ADSL Line Successfully Reset ADSL Line Upstream Noise Margin ATM Status Downstream Noise Margin ATM Loopback Test Back Chapter 12 Maintenance 114 P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Diagnostic DSL Line Reset ADSL Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line The large text box above then displays Line the progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully ATM Status Click this button to view ATM status ATM Loopback Click this button to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at Test least one PVC with proper V
99. abeled Modem to your Prestige 3 Connect the side labeled Line to the telephone wall jack Telephone Microfilters Telephone voice transmissions take place in the lower frequency range 0 4K Hz while ADSL transmissions take place in the higher bandwidth range above 4K Hz A microfilter acts as a low pass filter for your telephone to ensure that ADSL transmissions do not interfere with your telephone voice transmissions The use of a telephone microfilter is optional Appendix D Splitters and Microfilters 282 P 660R T Series User s Guide 1 Connect a phone cable from the wall jack to the single jack end of the Y Connector 2 Connect a cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the wall side of the microfilter 3 Connect another cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the Prestige 4 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure Figure 198 Connecting a Microfilter Y connector Wall Side Phone Side Prestige With ISDN This section relates to people who use their Prestige with ADSL over ISDN digital telephone service only The following is an example installation for the Prestige with ISDN Figure 199 Prestige with ISDN ISDN NT Ethernet 10 100BaseT ADSL 283 Appendix D Splitters and Microfilters P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix D Splitters and Microfilters 284 P 660R T Series User s Guide
100. ackets for instance the interface The interface can be an Ethernet or any other hardware port The following figure illustrates this Figure 122 Protocol and Device Filter Sets Interface gt 22 6 Example Filter Let s look at an example to block outside users from telnetting into the Prestige 187 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 123 Sample Telnet Filter WW SE User telnets into e Incoming Traffic IG BEN 1 Enter 21 in the main menu to display Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration 2 Enter the index number of the filter set you want to configure in this case 6 3 Type a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field for example TELNET WAN and press ENTER 4 Press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel to open Menu 21 6 Filter Rules Summary 5 Type I to configure the first filter rule Make the entries in this menu as shown next When you press ENTER to confirm the following screen appears Note that there is only one filter rule in this set Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 188 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 124 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter Menu 21 6 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Pree Fe G Filter Type TCP IP Filter Rule Active Yes IP Protocol 6 IP Source Route No Destination IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port 23 Port Comp Equal Source IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port Port Co
101. ails Have Disk OF Cancel Apply 3 In the Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 98 P 660R T Series User s Guide 99 Figure 36 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components Communications a x To install component select the check bos next to the component name or clear the check bos if you do not want to Install it shaded box means that only part of the component wll be installed To see what s included in component click Details Components SE NetMeeting Gry Phone Dialer 0 2 MB Universal Plug and Play 0 4 ME 0 0 MB e O ge Virtual Private Networking Space used by installed components 4 4 ME Space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk DE 2 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details IP ted 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 In the Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figure 37 Network Connections
102. al remote DHCP server here IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it Select the Active checkbox to enable the Any IP feature This allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address Any IP Setup and subnet mask of the computer even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet When you disable the Any IP feature only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN IP address can connect to the Prestige or access the Internet through the Prestige Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige gt Kei KE lt E Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 5 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide 65 Chapter 5 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings 6 1 WAN Overview A WAN Wide Area Network is an outside connection to another network or the Internet See Chapter 3 on page 44 for more information on the fields in the WAN screens 6 2 Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP rout
103. ancel The following figure shows how you apply NAT to the remote node in menu 11 1 1 Enter 11 from the main menu 2 When menu 11 appears as shown in the following figure type the number of the remote node that you want to configure 3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP Bridge field press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to bring up Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Figure 94 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min N A Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 My WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Metric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B Multicast None IP Policies Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL The following table describes the options for Network Address Translation 163 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 50 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 FIELD DESCRIPTION NAT Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige The SMT uses the address mapping set that you configure and enter in the Address Mapping Set field see Section 21 3 1 on page 164 Select None to disable NAT When you select SUA Only the SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 see Section 21 3 1 on page 164 Choose SUA Only i
104. appropriate Press SPACE BAR to select No and press ENTER to disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 153 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Static Route Setup This chapter shows how to setup IP static routes 19 1 IP Static Route Overview Static routes tell the Prestige routing information that it cannot learn automatically through other means This can arise in cases where RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that is directly connected to a remote node Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Prestige has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the Prestige knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the Prestige is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it does not know that there is a route through remote node Router I via Router 2 The static routes allow you to tell the Prestige about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 86 Sample Static Routing Topology N1 Va f T i L A 19 2 Configura
105. at 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices rrrnrrrrnnrnnnnennnnennnnrnnnnen 270 Figure 189 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General mrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrennnnennnrennnrennnnen 270 Figure 190 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS rrnrrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 271 Figure 191 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate 271 Figure 192 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO cece eee 212 Figure 193 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO rrnrrnrnrrnrnnennarennnnen 272 Figure 194 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf rararnnrnnnnnnnnrnanernnrnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennn 272 Figure 195 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card 273 Figure 196 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties 273 Figure 197 Connecting a POTS Splitter karelere bid iinan 282 Figure eelere EC tat LEE 283 FOUG Ke EG EEE iab nipi takeran 283 Figure 200 Single Computer per Router Hardware Configuration ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 293 Figure 201 Fresige as TET PE CIBI ene 293 Figure 202 Virtual Circuit Topology EE 294 22 P 660R T Series User s Guide 23 P 660R T Series User s Guide List of Tables Table 1 ADSL NNN TEE 32 Tabie 2 Front Pee LED DANN EE 37 Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary 42 Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen rrrurrnnurnnnnnnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 46 Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPOE EE 49 Table 6 Intern
106. ateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If pour network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask pour network administrator for an address and then type It in the space below Specify an IP address IY Detect connection to network media Cancel 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab If you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS If you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 260 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 176 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties d x Bindings Advanced MetBlOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IF Address Host Domain DAS Server Search Order EE a Doman Zaff Search Order lt ren Add Remove Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab e Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways e Ifyou have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 In the Run window type winipcf
107. ation budget is reset see menu 11 1 The elapsed time is the time used up within this period Enter O to update the screen or press ESC to return to the previous screen 26 3 Time and Date Setting The Prestige keeps track of the time and date There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Prestige Menu 24 10 allows you to update the time and date settings of your Prestige The real time is then displayed in the Prestige error logs Select menu 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance as shown next Figure 151 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 System Maintenance System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode s MOL Ee 0 Time and Date Setting 1 Remote Management is ds SC 4 Sr 6 Ta om 2 1 1 Enter Menu Selection Number Then enter 10 to go to Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting to update the time and date settings of your Prestige as shown in the following screen Chapter 26 System Maintenance 220 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 152 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Use Time Server when Bootup None Time Server Address N A Current Time 03 10 50 New Tim
108. ation files you must restart the network card Enter network restart inthe etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 272 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 195 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 Shutting down loopback interface Setting network parameters Bringing up loopback interface Bringing up interface eth0 OO 6 6 0 NAN Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig ina terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 196 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig ethO Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 met adar LT STN Reese 22 oe Loe MENN 525 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 130412 71342 Kb TX bytes 15710 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost 273 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix C IP Subnetting IP Addressing Routers route based on the network number The router that delivers the data packet to the correct destination host uses the host ID IP Classes An IP address is made up of four octets eight bits written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP addr
109. ause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user 1s encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Notice 1 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Certifications 1 Go to www zyxel com
110. ay Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed From this menu you have two choices as shown in the next figure Figure 132 Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed 1 System Information 2 Console Port Speed Please enter selection Note The Prestige has an internal console port for support personnel only Do not open the Prestige as it will void your warranty 24 3 1 System Information Enter 1 in menu 24 2 to display the screen shown next Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 198 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 133 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Name POGOR T3 TI Routing IP ZyNOS F W Version V3 40 ACM 0 11 05 2005 ADSL Chipset Vendor DMT FyVert Sulu0 4 B IG Hwer ECK Standard Multi Mode LAN Ethernet Address 00 13 49 00 00 01 IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server Press ESC Or RETURN to EXIT The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 63 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Name Displays the system name of your Prestige This information can be changed in Menu 1 General Setup Refers to the routing protocol used ZyNOS F W Version Refers to the ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System system firmware version ZyNOS is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Corporation ADSL Chi
111. bioms wiih he LAN LEL re in aia 242 30 3 Problems with the Password ranrnnnrrnnnvvnnnvnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnnenanennnnnnnsnnnne 243 Ne wih tme DSL LED ee 243 30 5 Problems with the LAN Interface A 243 30 6 Problems with the WAN Interface AA 244 P 660R T Series User s Guide 30 7 Problems with Internet S N eee sekkene 244 30 8 Problems with Remote Management uk 245 30 9 Problems with the Web Configurator cccccccssccsseecseeceeeceueeeeeesseeseeesnees 246 30 9 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions rrrarernrnnnrnannnn 246 30 9 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers 246 SER eg ENE 249 VL SIONS esken 251 Appendix A Product Specifications iisscssiissciscesiansadecasccdivecdicesuceesionsensdesassuduseinevncnrsdsanecsaucecssnss 254 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address rranrrnnnvnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnennnennnunen 258 SEE RE EE EE EE 258 free COMPONEN EE EEE 259 El le WEE 260 VATN 261 se ELT EG EE EEE EEE SE EE 261 TNT 266 MIN EE 266 pi UI So eet 268 MT NN 268 REENEN 269 UN EE EE 269 Using the K Desktop Environment RIDE 270 Using Configuration EEE Me DE 271 EEE EE ERR EE ENE 273 Appendix C Fm res 274 Fi Neve 274 Fr en 274 lat 275 El BEEN 215 DET Ge REE EEE NER 276 Tee GE GE EEE EE ER 278 Dee Je ET EE 279 Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks rrararrrrnnrnarernrrnnrnanennannnrnnnennnenn 280 Appendix D Splitters and dd re OTT CN
112. blink the defaults have been restored and the Prestige restarts 2 3 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the SITE MAP screen e Click Wizard Setup to begin a series of screens to configure your Prestige for the first time e Click a link under Advanced Setup to configure advanced Prestige features e Click a link under Maintenance to see Prestige performance statistics upload firmware and back up restore or upload a configuration file e Click SITE MAP to go to the Site Map screen e Click Logout in the navigation panel when you have finished a Prestige management session TOTAL INTERNET ACCESS SOLUTION Wizard Setup Wizard Setup Advanced Setup Maintenance Advanced Setup Wizard Seiu Password System Status LAN DHCP Table WA Any IP Tabie Maintenance MAT Diagnostic Secunty Firmware i ynanic ONS Logout Time and Date Remote Management UPnP Note Click the H L icon located in the top right corner of most screens to view embedded help Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary LINK SUB LINK FUNCTION Wizard Setup Connection Use these screens for initial configuration including general Setup setup ISP parameters for Internet Access and WAN IP DNS Server MAC address assignment Advanced Setup Password me Use this screen to change your password LAN Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP and TCP IP settings Chapter 2 Intr
113. box select Routing default if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop down list box Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE Multiplex Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based Ve Circuit VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit Encapsulation Refer to the appendix for more information a Enter the VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VA Enter the VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured Next Click this button to go to the next wizard screen The next wizard screen YOU see depends on what protocol you chose above Click on the protocol link to see the next wizard screen for that protocol 3 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses
114. c location up to 31 characters of your Prestige Contact Person s Enter the name up to 30 characters of the person in charge of this Prestige Name optional Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP You can go to menu 24 8 and type sys domainname to see the current domain name used by your gateway If you want to clear this field just press the SPACE BAR The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Edit Dynamic DNS _ Press the SPACE BAR to select Yes or No default Select Yes to configure Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS discussed next Route IP Set this field to Yes to enable or No to disable IP routing You must enable IP routing for Internet access Bridge Turn on off bridging for protocols not supported for example SNA or not turned on in the previous Route IP field Select Yes to turn bridging on select No to turn bridging off When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 14 2 1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use dynamic DNS To configure dynamic DNS go to Menu 1 General Setup and select Yes in the Edit Dynamic DNS field Press ENTER to display Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS as sh
115. cannot ping any If the 10M 100M LEDs on the front panel are both off refer to Section 30 2 on computer on the LAN page 242 Make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and the computers are on the same subnet 243 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 660R T Series User s Guide 30 6 Problems with the WAN Interface Table 80 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot get a The ISP provides the WAN IP address after authenticating you Authentication WAN IP address may be through the user name and password the MAC address or the host name from the ISP The username and password apply to PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation only Make sure that you have entered the correct Service Type User Name and Password be sure to use the correct casing Refer to Chapter 6 on page 66 web configurator or Chapter 17 on page 136 SMT 30 7 Problems with Internet Access Table 81 Troubleshooting Internet Access PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot access Make sure the Prestige is turned on and connected to the network the Internet If the DSL LED is off refer to Section 30 4 on page 243 Verify your WAN settings Refer to the chapter on WAN setup web configurator or the section on Internet Access SMT Make sure you entered the correct user name and password If you use PPPoE pass through make sure that bridge is turned on See Chapter 14 on page 124 for details Internet Check the sched
116. ch LAN network Note Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A B and C Chapter 17 Internet Access 136 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 67 IP Alias Network Example A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 Menu 3 2 Interface prs C 192 168 3 1 192 168 3 24 Menu 3 2 1 lt Use menu 3 2 1 to configure IP Alias on your Prestige 17 4 IP Alias Setup Use menu 3 2 to configure the first network Move the cursor to Edit IP Alias field and press SPACEBAR to choose Yes and press ENTER to configure the second and third network Figure 68 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Addr ess 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 RIP Direction None Version RIP 2B Multicast None IP Policies Edit IP Alias Yes Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Pressing ENTER displays Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup as shown next 137 Chapter 17 Internet Access P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 69 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup Menu 3 2 1 TR A1448 Setup IP Alias 1 Yes IP Address 192 168 2 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction None Version RIP 1 Incoming protocol filters Outgoing protocol filters
117. cket Filter Logs TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Attempted access matched a configured filter rule denoted by G neric packet filter its set and rule number and was blocked or forwarded matched set d rule d according to the rule Appendix F Log Descriptions P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 103 CDR Logs board d lines d channel d The router received the setup requirements for a call call is ES 1154 58 COL Outgoing Cali the reference count number of the call dev is the device dav ch Sx 5 type 3 is for dial up 6 is for PPPoE 10 is for PPTP channel or ch is the call channel ID For example board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 3 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call is connected call d 38 C02 OutCall Connected d s board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call was disconnected call d s C02 Call Terminated Table 104 PPP Logs The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage has started The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is opening The PPP connection s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening Table 105 ICMP Notes o Jemen SSCS fo Jeemoropymemee gt p foestnaon mesen gt O e i emes S i name gt O po rom gt mee A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don t Fragment oud TI mme gt
118. coming from clients with IP addresses of 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 to be routed to the Internet via the WAN port of the Prestige follow the steps as shown next 1 Create a routing policy set in menu 25 2 Create a rule for this set in Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy as shown next Figure 160 IP Routing Policy Example 1 Menu 25 11 IP Routing Poliey Policy Set Name setl Active Yes Criteria IP Protocol 6 Type of Service Don t Care Packet length 10 Precedence Don t Care Len Comp N A Source addr start 192 168 1 33 end 192 168 1 64 port start 0 end N A Destination addr start end N A port start 80 end 80 Action Matched Gateway addr 192 160 1 el Log No Type of Service No Change Precedence No Change Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 234 P 660R T Series User s Guide 3 Check Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup to see if the rule is added correctly 4 Create another policy set in menu 25 5 Create a rule in menu 25 1 for this set to route packets from any host IP 0 0 0 0 means any host with protocol TCP and port FTP access through another gateway 192 168 1 100 Figure 161 IP Routing Policy Example 2 Menn 25 lel TP Routing POLICY Policy Set Name set2 Active Yes Criteria IP Prorocol 6 Type of Service Don t Care Packet length 10 Precedence Don t Care Len Comp N A Source addr start 0 0 0 0end N A port start 0 end N A Destinatio
119. d II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you Graphics Icons Key Notebook computer Preface P 660R T Series User s Guide Introduction to DSL DSL Digital Subscriber Line technology enhances the data capacity of the existing twisted pair wire that runs between the local telephone company switching offices and most homes and offices While the wire itself can handle higher frequencies the telephone switching equipment is designed to cut off signals above 4 000 Hz to filter noise off the voice line but now everybody is searching for ways to get more bandwidth to improve access to the Web hence DSL technologies There are actually seven types of DSL service ranging in speeds from 16 Kbits sec to 52 Mbits sec The services are either symmetrical traffic flows at the same speed in both directions or asymmetrical the downstream capacity is higher than the upstream capacity Asymmetrical services ADSL are suitable for Internet users because more information is usually downloaded than uploaded For example a simple button click in a web browser can start an extended download that includes graphics and text As data rates increase the carrying distance decreases That means that users who are beyond a certain distance from the telephone company s central office may not be able to obtain the higher speeds A DSL connection is a point to point dedicated circuit meaning that the link is always up and ther
120. dd 2000 Jo Ja Time Current Time oi bn Jan Mew Time m bn He Apply Cancel Chapter 9 Time and Date 90 P 660R T Series User s Guide 91 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Time and Date mesen o Select the time service protocol that your time server uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main difference between them is the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 Select None to enter the time and date manually IP Address or URL Enter the IP address or URL of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time and Date Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Select this option if you use daylight savings time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Start Date Enter the month and day that your daylight savings time starts on if you selected Daylight Savings End Date E
121. ddress Mapping Rules Local Start IP Local End IP Local End IP es Global Start IP SES Global End IP a Rule Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Address Mapping Rules LABEL Local Start IP Global End IP DESCRIPTION This is the Starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping This is the end Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to one and Server mapping types This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for Many to One and Server mapping types This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is N A for One to one Many to One and Server mapping types Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 84 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 19 Address Mapping Rules continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type 1 1 One to one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type M 1 Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature t
122. ddresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers 3 2 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen Verify the settings in the screen shown next To change the LAN information on the Prestige click Change LAN Configurations Otherwise click Save Settings to save the configuration and skip to the section 3 13 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 52 P 660R T Series User s Guide 53 Figure 11 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access WAH Information Mode Routing Encapsulation PPPoE Multiplexing LLC VEINS 8 35 Service Mame User Name usergicnch Password 4 IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Metwork Address Translation SUA Onky Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 sec LAN Information IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP ON Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Change LAN Configuration Save settings If you want to change your Prestige LAN settings click Change LAN Configuration to display the screen as shown next Chapter 3 Wizard Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access LAN IP Address fi 92 158 1 1 LAN Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server ON v Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IF Pool 32
123. de Table 73 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Gateway addr Defines the outgoing gateway address The gateway must be on the same subnet as the Prestige if it is on the LAN otherwise the gateway must be the IP address of a remote node The default gateway is specified as 0 0 0 0 Type of Service Set the new TOS value of the outgoing packet Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing No Change Normal Min Delay Max Thruput Max Reliable or Min Cost Precedence Set the new outgoing packet precedence value Values are 0 to 7 or No Change Log Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to make an entry in the system log when a policy is executed When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 28 5 Applying an IP Policy This section shows you where to apply the IP policies after you design them 28 5 1 Ethernet IP Policies From Menu 3 Ethernet Setup type 2 to go to Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup You can choose up to four IP policy sets from 12 by typing their numbers separated by commas for example 2 4 7 9 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 232 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 157 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 160 1433 Size of
124. ding Firmware and Configuration Files rrrrnrrrrnnrrnnnrnrnnrennnrnvnnrennnnen 213 29 4 1 Firmware File IG susci EE 213 25A 2 Conhguralion File VUNNET EE 213 25 4 3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 214 P 660R T Series User s Guide 25 4 4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload rrrnnrornnoranennnrnnnrnnnrr 215 NTP Fe eee 215 25 4 6 TFTP Upload Command Example a nnannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnennnn 216 Chapter 26 ovSi m REGER 218 26 1 Command Interpreter Mode oreiscistconeanisevarensavsverssiintateaveutesiausseeeermnsverestessensts 218 AS KG oe SUDDO RE ER EE EN 219 BENN 219 20 3 Me and Date SONG WT 220 e A Resetting Me TIME EES 221 Chapter 27 kamols FAMAJ MEN escra aE 224 27 1 Remote Management Overview rrarrnanrnnnrnnnrnnanrnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnennne 224 217 2 Remote Management REE EE ENN 224 21 2 1 Remote Management Setup EE 224 21 2 2 Remote Management Limitations 225 27 3 Remote Management and NAT rrrannnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennne 226 TNT rE ER 226 Chapter 28 FFO FN 228 28 1 IP Policy Routing he 228 29 2 Beneit OF IF ge Koutn EE 228 E E O TEE 228 20A IF Routing Foley SIUD EE i 229 eea NONNO AMI PU EE 232 20 9 1 Ethernet e EE 232 SES HS PNG 230 Chapter 29 GT ge EN NE 238 E WEI POEL RENN EE SN 238 Chapter 30 phas Ju REE EEE E 242 30 1 Problems Starting UD the Prestige gege AER KEE Kaf 242 30 2 Fro
125. dresses AA 58 MT NPE NN 62 FOT SN NN vrede 63 Figure TENNE TN S NN egener 68 FS TT NED PP TE NET 69 Figure 20 Traffic Redirect Example Lumucasnimemnmmemanmnteermemirei vu ted e kvie 12 Figure 21 Traffic Redirect LAN E 72 FET e da 73 Foure 23 How NAT WOKS eege eege 78 Figure 24 NAT Application With IP Alias csiciiincdsadicinveriesciactharantonevsinninsevehuaiersdanseustecsieaneinve 78 Figure 25 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnevnnnnnnnennnennnennnennnnnnnnennn 81 WT Wl ER EE A NE 82 Figure 27 Edit SUA NAT Server Set Lee 83 Figure 28 Address Mapping Rules eStNESEUERRENSEEEEERN SEN EEE SEENEN SEENEN ENER Neg 84 Figure 29 Address Mapping Rule EE 85 REENEN REE 89 EE 0 EE ETE EO EEE EE 90 Figure 32 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network 93 Figure 33 Remote Management ANNER 94 FL EEE Ta SL JP REN 97 Figure 35 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication 98 Figure 36 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components 99 P 660R T Series User s Guide Foue ar NTN reke en 99 Figure 38 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard rrrrrnrrnanennnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 100 Figure 39 Networking Services E 100 Figuro 40 Network EE sanke 101 Figure 41 Internet Connection Properties 102 Figure 42 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings 103 Figure 43 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add 103 Figure 44 System Tray Icon EEE EE EE 104 Figure 4
126. e Sound 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 185 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP EE TEP IF Connect wla Ethernet Setup Configure Using DHEP Server IF Address s will be supplied by server gt Subnet mask lt will be supplied by server gt Roter address will be supplied by server gt Search domains Name server addr will be supplied by server 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 267 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide 4 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure box select Manually e Type your IP address in the IP Address box e Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box e Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 186 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac Get Mac 05 X Software System Preferences Dock Location 2 Click Network in the icon bar e Select Automatic from the Location list e Select Built in Ethernet f
127. e hh mm ss 03 10 43 Current Date 2000 0I G New Date yyyy mm dd AOI c EC te 04 Time Zone GMT Daylight Saving No Start Date mm dd 01 00 End Date mm dd 01 00 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Table 70 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Use Time Server Enter the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on when Bootup the Prestige Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None The default enter the time manually Time Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Current Time This field displays an updated time only when you reenter this menu New Time Enter the new time in hour minute and second format Current Date This field displays an updated date only when you re enter this menu New Date Enter the new date in year month and day format Time Zone Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Ti
128. e Set Setup E 239 Table 75 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Prestige rrrrrrnrrrernranrvnnrvnnevnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 242 Table 76 Troubleshooting the LAN LED 242 Table 77 Troubleshooting the ET EE 243 Table ZS Iroubleshooting the DSL LED geet en eeieet dagegen det age Eegge gd 243 Table 79 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface rrrrrrerrnnrnannnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnannanenannnnennrnnnnanenusnne 243 25 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 80 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface rrrrrrrranenannanrnnnennrnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnene 244 Table 81 Troubleshooting Internet ACCESS rrnrrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnanennnnnnnsnnnsen 244 Table 82 Troubleshooting Remote Management 245 Table 83 Troubleshooting the Web Configurator rrrrrnnrrannnnrnanerarnnnrnannnnrrannnernnennaennennnnen 246 Table 54 DEVICE NG a A EA A 254 TORSO F EE aE A A ATA 255 Table 86 Classes of IP Addresses rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnanrnanennnnnnernnanenanenanennnennnnnnnsee 274 Table 87 Allowed IP Address Range By Class rrranrnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnannnnnennnenn 215 Pee en TEE EE 275 Table 89 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 276 Table 90 Two Subnets Example RR 276 Eis Eu WEE 217 TEN SURET EE 217 NNN EE 278 TR TN EE 278 TN TN 278 ee SE EEE EE EN 279 ENE NGS 279 Table 98 Class C PN sanere 279 TDG JI GaSe E NN EE 280 Table 100 System Maintenance LogS rrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnn
129. e a maximum of 24 rules active for a single port For incoming packets your Prestige applies data filters only Packets are processed depending on whether a match is found The following sections describe how to configure filter sets 22 1 1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige A filter set consists of one or more filter rules Usually you would group related rules for example all the rules for NetBIOS into a single set and give it a descriptive name You can configure up to twelve filter sets with six rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system 179 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide 22 2 Configuring a Filter Set for the Prestige To configure a filter set follow the steps shown next 1 Enter 21 in the main menu to display Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration as shown next Figure 116 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Filter Filter Set Comments Set Comments 1 7 2 NetBIOS WAN 8 3 NetBIOS LAN 9 4 10 5 11 WebSetl 6 12 WebSet2 Enter Filter Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Comments N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 2 Type the filter set to configure no 1 to 12 and press ENTER 3 Type a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field and press ENTER 4 Press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to confirm to display Menu 21 1 Filter Rules Summary that is if you selected filter set I in
130. e default password by following the steps shown next 1 Enter 23 in the main menu to display Menu 23 System Password as shown next 2 Type your existing system password in the Old Password field for example 1234 and press ENTER Figure 59 Menu 23 Change Password Menu 23 System Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 3 Type your new system password in the New Password field up to 30 characters and press ENTER Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT 122 P 660R T Series User s Guide 4 Re type your new system password in the Retype to confirm field for confirmation and press ENTER Note Note that as you type a password the screen displays an for each character you type 123 Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system related information 14 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system related information shown next The System Name field is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name e In Windows 95 98 click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name e In Windows 2000 click Start Settings Control Panel a
131. e fields in this menu Table 39 Menu 2 1Traffic Redirect Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Press SPACE BAR and select Yes to enable or No to disable traffic redirect setup The default is No Enter the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige s Internet connection terminates Metric This field sets this route s priority among the routes the Prestige uses The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 130 P 660R T Series User s Guide 131 Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup This chapter covers how to configure your wired Local Area Network LAN settings 16 1 LAN Setup This section describes how to configure the Ethernet using Menu 3 LAN Setup From the main menu enter 3 to display menu 3 Figure 64 Men
132. e is no dialing required Introduction to ADSL It is an asymmetrical technology meaning that the downstream data rate is much higher than the upstream data rate As mentioned this works well for a typical Internet session in which more information is downloaded for example from Web servers than is uploaded ADSL operates in a frequency range that is above the frequency range of voice services so the two systems can operate over the same cable Introduction to DSL 30 P 660R T Series User s Guide 31 Introduction to DSL P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige This chapter describes the key features and applications of your Prestige 1 1 Introducing the Prestige Your Prestige integrates a high speed 10 100Mbps auto negotiating LAN interface and a high speed ADSL port into a single package The Prestige is an ADSL Ethernet Gateway compatible with the ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 standards It allows super fast secure Internet access over the analog POTS or digital ISDN telephone line depending on your model Maximum data rates attainable by the Prestige for each standard are shown in the next table Table 1 ADSL Standards DATARATE STANDARD UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM ADSL 832 kbps 8Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 12Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 24Mbps Note The standard your ISP supports determines the maximum upstream and downstream speeds attainable Actual speeds attained also depend on the distance from your ISP
133. ection D View status of this Minternet Connection Disable Status Create Shortcut r LE TELE Rename connection Change settings of this Properties rannertinn a 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created 101 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 41 Internet Connection Properties T Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using J Internet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through shared connection on another computer Se ste EE Show icon In notification area when connected 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 102 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 42 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Services Select the services running on your network that Internet users can ACCESS Services manage Delete Figure 43 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Mame or IF address for example 192 160 0 12 of the computer hosting this Service on your network External Port number for this service TCP C UDP Internal Part number for this service 1143 ca
134. ed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the Prestige An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration 192 The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include the number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations e Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent e GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations e Set Allows the manager to set value
135. een changed on the command line Chapter 27 Remote Management 226 P 660R T Series User s Guide 227 Chapter 27 Remote Management P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 28 IP Policy Routing This chapter covers setting and applying policies used for IP routing 28 1 IP Policy Routing Overview Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the IAD takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Routing Policy IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis prior to the normal routing 28 2 Benefits of IP Policy Routing Source Based Routing Network administrators can use policy based routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections Quality of Service QoS Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the precedence or TOS Type of Service values in the IP header at the periphery of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic Cost Savings IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high bandwidth high cost paths while using low cost paths for batch traffic Load Sharing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths 28 3 Routing Policy Individual routing policies are used as part of the overall IPPR proc
136. el Network Connections Properties Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help W Back gt Ka pi Search Wey Folders RE Address Ls Network Connections A LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks 2 ocal Area Connection D Create a new nabled connection E A standard PCI Fast Ethernet Ada ibe Za Set up home or small Disable office network Wi Disable this network device Repair EA Repair this connection Status Bridge Connections mi Rename this connection K3 view status of this ee connection FS Rename Create Shortcut Change settings of this connection 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 180 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties t Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using B Accton EN12070 TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following hems Description Transmission Control Protocol lnternet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP e Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically e Ifyou have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fi
137. el com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp CORPORATE www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II HEADQUARTERS Science Park WORLDWIDE sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o CZECH REPUBLIC info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXELCommunications A S DENMARK Columbusvej 5 sales Qzyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND Malminkaari 10 sales Qzyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki info zyxel fr 33 0 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 0 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Anaheim SE support Qzyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL CommunicationsA S NORWAY Nils Hansens vei 13 sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications Alejandro Villegas 33 sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 1 28043 Madrid Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 ZyXEL Communications A S Sj por
138. em firmware using TFTP please see your manual Press ENTER to Exit 25 4 2 Configuration File Upload You see the following screen when you telnet into menu 24 7 2 213 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 145 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File To upload the system configuration file follow the procedure below te Launch the FTP client on your w rkstati0n 2 Type open and the IP address of your system Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put configuration filename rom 0 where configurationfilename is the name of your system configuration file on your workstation which will be transferred to the rom 0 file on the system 4 The system reboots automatically after the upload system configuration file process is complete For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP please see your manual Press ENTER to Exit To upload the firmware and the configuration file follow these examples 25 4 3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted fo
139. endix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 188 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices KgNetwork Configuration LE File Profile Help BY f New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices aE You may FEE network devices associated with NE physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be d associated LAR a ethno piece of hardv of hardware EE Wi e inactive p SCH Go BN Ethernet S 2 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown Figure 189 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General Hardware Device Nickname etho Activate device when computer starts C Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with DHCP Settings Hostname optional Automatically obtain DNS information from provider O Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Address Subnet Mask Ce Default Gateway Address Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 270 P 660R T Series User s Guide e If
140. ention 11 2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum Creates UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports IGD 1 0 Internet Gateway Device At the time of writing ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4 6 and 4 7 while Windows Messenger 5 0 and Xbox are still being tested UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN See later sections for examples of installing UPnP in Windows XP and Windows Me as well as an example of using UPnP in Windows 11 2 1 Configuring UPnP 97 From the Site Map in the main menu click UPnP under Advanced Setup to display the screen shown next Figure 34 Configuring UPnP Enable the Universal Plug and PlayilPnP Service Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Configuring UPnP Enable the Universal Plug Select this checkbox to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use and Play UPnP Service a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the Prestige s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Allow users to make Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to configuration changes automatically configure the Prestige so that they can communicate through UPnP through the Prestige for example by using NAT
141. ents along with the IP address and the subnet mask Server Remote DHCP If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the Serve actual remote DHCP server here Follow the instructions in the following table to configure TCP IP parameters for the Ethernet port Table 41 TCP IP Ethernet Setup IP Address Enter the LAN IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige refer to Appendix C on page 274 for more information RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP direction Choices are Both In Only Out Only or None Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP version Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and version 2 IGMP v2 Press the SPACE BAR to enable IP Multicasting or select None to disable it IP Policies Create policies using SMT menu 25 see Chapter 28 on page 228 and apply them on the Prestige LAN interface here You can apply up to four IP policy sets from twelve by entering their numbers separated by commas Edit IP Alias The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethe
142. eoirsvhe edmaisiikeevon 155 Figure 90 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile A 159 Figure 91 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 159 Figure 92 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route NENNEN 160 Figure 93 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet ACCESS rrrnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 163 Figure 94 Applying NAT in Menus ASIA 163 FOO Menu 19 NAI SOUD messenger deed 164 Figure 96 Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets etneaentbteesggeueb ick desebtgee b erdeg bie g tee 165 Figure 97 Menu 15 1 255 SUA Address Mapping Rules rrnrrnnrrennnrennrrennerennrennnrennnrennnn 165 Figure 98 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule ina Set rrrrrnnnennnrnnnrn 168 Figure 99 Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup Leam sarkasme E 169 Figure 100 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup rrrnnrrnnnrnnnrrnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnanrnnnrnnnnnnnnenne 169 Figure 101 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example rannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 170 FE TC T EE 170 Figure 103 Menu 4 Internet Access amp NAT Example c cccccseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseneens 171 FN EE eebe ebe 171 Figure 105 Menu 15 2 1 Specifying an Inside Server rrranrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnne 172 Foure NE EE EE S ER 173 Foure BES CA EE SE EE E 173 Figure 108 Example 3 Menu 15 1 1 1 Luussmeuineskeeeiukavmmikeseiiu evt bevbiisie 174 Foure TEKMO Filial MBN 15 101 WEE 174 Fague TENNE are 175 FG TED TEE EE EE tr ate 175 F
143. er types Server Only available when Type is set to Server Type a number from 1 to 10 to choose a Mapping Set server set from menu 15 2 When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 21 4 Configuring a Server behind NAT Follow these steps to configure a server behind NAT 1 Enter 15 in the main menu to go to Menu 15 NAT Setup 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sets as shown next Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 168 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 99 Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sets Server Set I Used for SUA Only Server Set 2 Server Set 3 Server Set 4 Server Set 5 Server Set 6 Server Set 7 Server Set 8 Server Set 9 Server Set 1 O o OANA Oa BF WN EF H O Enter Set Number to Edit 3 Enter I to go to Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup as follows Figure 100 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No End Port No IP Address ea Default Default 0 0 0 0 2 21 21 192 168 1 33 3 O O 0 0 0 0 4 O O 0 0 0 0 ee O O 0 0 0 0 6 O O 0 0 0 0 7 O O 0 0 0 0 8 O O 0 0 0 0 9 O O 0 0 0 0 10 O O 0050 11 O O 0 0 0 0 12 O O 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 4 Enter a port number in an unused Start Port No field To forward only one port enter it again in the End Port No field T
144. es User s Guide 256 P 660R T Series User s Guide 257 Appendix A P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 258 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 174 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration BE Network m LPR for TCRAP Printing s t 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI T NIC 30905B T if Dial Up Adapter MUSE Fast Ethernet Adapter is TEFAF 3Com EtherLink 10 700 PEETS NIC ESCHEID lc A Client for Microsoft Network E Installing C
145. ess A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The criteria includes the source address and port IP protocol ICMP UDP TCP etc destination address and port TOS and precedence fields in the IP header and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications for example telnet tend to have short packets while bulk traffic for example file transfer tends to have large packets The actions that can be taken include Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 228 P 660R T Series User s Guide e routing the packet to a different gateway and hence the outgoing interface e setting the TOS and precedence fields in the IP header IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of RAS in style and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related policies are grouped together A user defines the policies before applying them to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are 12 policy sets with six policies in each set 28 4 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 shows all the policies defined Figure 154 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Enter Policy Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Name N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel To setup a routing policy perform the follow
146. ess supplied by your ISP when you use ENET Gateway ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen Network Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop sown list box Refer to the NAT Address chapter for more details Translation Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen Figure 10 Internet Connection with PPPoA Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access User Name ChangeMe Password kon IP Address Ge Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address Connection Ge Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 ser Nailed Up Connection Network Address Translation SUA Ony gt 51 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Internet Connection with PPPoA Enter the login name that your ISP gives you Enter the password associated with the user name above IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Click Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise click Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below Prestige will try to bring
147. esses are categorized into different classes The class of an address depends on the value of its first octet e Class A addresses have a 0 in the left most bit In a class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID e Class B addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit In a class B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID e Class C addresses begin starting from the left with 1 1 0 In a class C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID e Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting There is also a class E address It is reserved for future use Table 86 Classes of IP Addresses ClassA jo Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Network number Network number Network number Host ID Note Host IDs of all zeros or all ones are not allowed Therefore A class C network 8 host bits can have 2 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 16 host bits can have 216 _9 or 65534 hosts A class A address 24 host bits can have 2 2 hosts approximately 16 million hosts Appendix C IP Subnetting 274 P 660R T Series User s Guide Since the first octet of a class A IP address mus
148. et Connection with RFC 1483 rrannnanennrnanennnnnnrnanennennnnnnnnanennnnnernnnennnnnnennsene 50 Table 7 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP rerernnnnnnnnnnennnnnnrnnnnnanennrnnnnnnnnnnennsnnnennnene 51 Table 8 Internet Connection with PPPOA bodergede ner eseu AER ege 52 Table 9 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration rrurernnrnnrnnnnnrannranennnrnnnnnnnnnn 54 NNN pinta presenta esa a eee 56 ET el TW MPa ee WETTER 63 TITTET irs ieced gangs ake pastaadesd asd cess oe A a ents al eieiaiee 69 Ke EEE AT EE 73 Tabie 14 NNN GAGN 76 Table 15 NAT Mapping TypeS ER EE NE ERE 79 Table 16 Services and Port Numbers ET 80 Table 17 NAT Mode TE 82 Tabie 18 Edit SUA NAT SIV Sr Get EN 83 Table 19 Address Mapping Rules secscccsdessexssncaannaiwsasvanaiasessimensyineianneandacsnueneeiacianedieteieesenets 84 Table 20 Address Mapping Rule Edit rrrennrnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennneen 86 ENTEN EE 89 Tope 2 MME aNG DI EE 91 Table 23 Remote Management Ledang knekanp 94 TONE NET EE 97 pre SP EEE ENER EE ON MN 109 Table 26 System Status Show Statistics EEN 111 FN Jr 112 FTP aS 112 Table 29 Beg ET 5 EE EE 114 ES GER sg DSL ONG EEE ai deaan 115 FRITT AGS 116 Table RENTE ES ET EEE EE 119 Table 33 Navigating the SMT Interface rrarrrrrnnnnvanernannnnnnernnnnnnnnanevannnnnnnennannaenunennsnnusnnn 120 PER KG ETE EEE 121 Table 35 Main Menu Summary EE 122 Table 36 Menu 1 General Setup rrrn
149. etails on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on backup using TFTP note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP please see your Prestige manual Press ENTER to Exit 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Find the rom file on your computer that you want to restore to your Prestige 7 Use put to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer for example put config rom rom O transfers the configuration file config rom on your computer to the Prestige See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 8 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt The Prestige will automatically restart after a successful restore process 25 3 2 Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 143 Restore Using FTP Session Example ftp gt put config rom rom 0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom 0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp 16384 bytes sent in 0 06Seconds 273 07Kbytes sec ftp gt quit Refer to Section 25 2 5 on page 209 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 2
150. f hosts each subnet can have Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 2 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 1s the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 217 Appendix C IP Subnetting P 660R T Series User s Guide Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all 0 s is the subnet itself all 1 s is the broadcast address on the subnet Table 93 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 C IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 1
151. f you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 21 3 NAT Setup Use the address mapping sets menus and submenus to create the mapping table used to assign global addresses to computers on the LAN Set 255 is used for SUA When you select Full Feature in menu 4 or 11 3 the SMT will use Set 1 When you select SUA Only the SMT will use the pre configured Set 255 read only The server set is a list of LAN servers mapped to external ports To use this set a server rule must be set up inside the NAT address mapping set Please see the section on port forwarding in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens for further information on these menus To configure NAT enter 15 from the main menu to bring up the following screen Figure 95 Menu 15 NAT Setup Menu 15 NAT Setup 1 Address Mapping Sets 2 NAT Server Sets Enter Menu Selection Number 21 3 1 Address Mapping Sets Enter to bring up Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 164 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 96 Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets 1 ACL Default Set 2 3 4 on 6 7 8 255 SUA read only Enter Menu Selection Number 21 3 1 1 SUA Address Mapping Set 165 Enter 255 to display the next screen see also Section 21 1 on page 162 The fields in this menu cannot be changed Figure 97 Menu 15 1 255 SUA Address Mapping Rules Menu 15 1 255 Add
152. fer Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 nr Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 80 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 16 Services and Port Numbers continued SERVICES PORT NUMBER HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 7 3 3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet IP address assigned by ISP Figure 25 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 192 168 1 1 FTP Telnet SMTP Server h gt 192 168 1 33 W eier LAN Ker NW A 192 168 1 34 B 192 168 1 35 gt nn C 192 168 1 36 IP address assigned by ISP 7 4 Selecting the NAT Mode Click NAT to open the following screen 81 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 26 NAT Mode NAT Mode Network Address Translation None SUA Only Edit Details Full Fea
153. g and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel 261 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 177 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer G My Documents Kei Outlook Express WM Paint S Files and Settings Transfer W AN Ei Command Prompt yay My Music Acrobat Reader 4 0 EI My Computer di Tour Windows XP 4 My Recent Documents VE My Pictures Eg Windows Movie Maker E Control Panel SH Va Printers and Faxes SI Help and Support All Programs gt Ei Log OFF fo Turn OFF Computer 5 untitled Paint 2 In the Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT Figure 178 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back 3 A Search ig Folders address 2 Control Panel LP Control Fanel 4 Network hdd Hardware g Switch to Category view Connections See Also G Windows Update Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 262 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 179 Windows XP Control Pan
154. ge automatically tests the connection to the computer s connected to the LAN ports To test the connection from the Prestige to the ISP click Start Diagnose Otherwise click Return to Main Menu to go back to the Site Map screen Figure 13 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Tests Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access LAN connections Testyour Ethernet Connection WAN connections Test ADSL synchronization Test ADSLIATM OA loopback test Test PPPJPPPOE server connection Ping default gateway Start Diagnose Return to Main Menu 3 2 7 1 Test Your Internet Connection Launch your web browser and navigate to www zyxel com Internet access is just the beginning Refer to the rest of this User s Guide for more detailed information on the complete range of Prestige features If you cannot access the Internet open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the Wizard Setup are correct bb Chapter 3 Wizard Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 4 Password Setup This chapter provides information on the Password screen 4 1 Password Overview It is highly recommended that you change the password for accessing the Prestige 4 1 1 Configuring Password To change your Prestige s password recommended click Password in the Site Map screen The screen appears as shown Figure 14 Password Password Old Password Mew Password Retype to
155. group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the Prestige queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Prestige periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the Prestige LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 5 5 Any IP Traditionally you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the Prestige to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet through the Prestige In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the Prestige With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled the Prestige allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static fixed IP address you can simply connect the computer to the Prestige and access the Internet The following figure depic
156. guration at start up from a server You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Prestige provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If set to None DHCP service will be disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured Click Maintenance and then the DHCP Table tab Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP Client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the DHCP server Chapter 12 Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 51 DHCP Table DACP Table Host Hame IP Address MAC Address 192168 1 33 00 00 E8 70 14 80 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 27 DHCP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the name of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the Host Name field MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed host name Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 12 4 Any IP Table Screen Click Maintenance Any IP The Any IP table shows current read only information including the IP address and the MAC address of all networ
157. gure 113 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name Example4 Pox local Start ZER Local End IP 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 12 10 132 50 1 Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 176 P 660R T Series User s Guide 177 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Filter Configuration This chapter shows you how to create and apply filters 22 1 About Filtering Your Prestige uses filters to decide whether or not to allow passage of a data packet and or to make a call There are two types of filter applications data filtering and call filtering Filters are subdivided into device and protocol filters which are discussed later Data filtering screens data to determine if the packet should be allowed to pass Data filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters depending on the direction of the packet relative to a port Data filtering can be applied on either the WAN side or the Ethernet side Call filtering is used to determine if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call Outgoing packets must undergo data filtering before they encounter call filtering Call filters are divided into two groups the built in call filters and user defined call filters Your Prestige has built in call filters that prevent administrative for example RIP packets from triggering cal
158. hange your Prestige s DDNS click Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup 88 P 660R T Series User s Guide 89 Figure 30 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS I active Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG 7 Host Name E mail Address O OS ser Password I Enable wildcard Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Dynamic DNS Joson Enable wicara Enable Wildcard Select the check box to enable DYNDNS Wildcard Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Time and Date This screen is not available on all models Use this screen to configure the Prestige s time and date settings 9 1 Configuring Time and Date To change your Prestige s time and date click Time And Date The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the Prestige s time based on your local time zone Figure 31 Time and Date Time and Date Time Server Use Protocol when Bootup None IF Address or URL BA Time and Date GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London I Daylight Savings Start Date fi month 1 day End Date fi manth 1 day F Synchronize system clock with Time Server now This may take up to 60 seconds Date Current Date O00 fo fo Mew Date Qyyy mim
159. hat previous ZyXEL routers supported only M M Ov Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses MM No No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Click Back to return to the NAT Mode screen 7 7 Editing an Address Mapping Rule To edit an address mapping rule click the rule s link in the NAT Address Mapping Rules screen to display the screen shown next Figure 29 Address Mapping Rule Edit MAT Edit Address Mapping Rule T Type One to One Local Start IP 0 0 0 0 Local End IP Hi Global Start IP 0 0 0 0 Global End IP N A Server Mapping Set N A Edit Details Apply Cancel Delete 85 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Address Mapping Rule Edit Type Choose the port mapping type from one of the following e One to One One to One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for One to one NAT mapping type Many to One Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL
160. hat want to establish TCP connection s SYN 1 and ACK 0 else it is ignored More If Yes a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields If More is Yes then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be N A Log Select the logging option from the following None No packets will be logged Action Matched Only packets that match the rule parameters will be logged Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged Both All packets will be logged Action Matched Select the action for a matching packet Choices are Check Next Rule Forward or Drop Action Not Select the action for a packet not matching the rule Choices are Check Next Rule Matched Forward or Drop When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel The following figure illustrates the logic flow of an IP filter Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 184 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 120 Executing an IP Filter Packet into IP Filter ve Yes Y Apply SrcAddrMask to Src Addr Matched y Apply DestAddrMask to Dest Addr M gt AA gt Matched More Yes y
161. he outside world Note Port numbers do not change for One to One and Many to Many No Overload NAT mapping types The following table summarizes these types Table 15 NAT Mapping Types Sie MAPPING SMT ABBREVIATION Many to One SUA PAT ILA1 lt gt IGA1 M 1 ILA2 gt IGA1 Many to Many Overload ILA1 lt 7 gt IGA1 M M O ILA2 gt 3 IGA2 ILA3 lt gt IGA1 ILA4 gt 3 IGA2 Many to Many No Overload ILA1 lt 7 gt IGA1 M M N ILA2 gt IGA2 ILA3 lt 7 gt IGA3 Server 1 IP gt 3 IGA1 Server Server 2 IP gt IGA1 Server 3 IP amp 3 IGA1 7 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT 79 SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in Table 15 on page 79 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens P 660R T Series User s Guide Note 1 Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 2 Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige 7 3 SUA Server A SUA server set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though SUA makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world You
162. he time and date from the NTP server The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server The router was not able to connect to the Time server The router was not able to connect to the NTP server The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large An SMT management session has started An SMT management session has ended 288 P 660R T Series User s Guide 289 Table 100 System Maintenance Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Configuration Change PC The router is saving configuration changes Oxsx Task ID Ox x Successful SSH login Someone has logged on to the router s SSH server SSH login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s SSH server Successful HTTPS login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol HTTPS login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol Table 101 System Error Logs s exceeds the max This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of session per number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host host setNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings error readNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings error WAN connection is down A WAN connection is down You cannot access the network through this interface Table 102 Pa
163. hen type root and SMT password as requested 3 Locate the rom 0 file 4 Type get rom 0 to back up the current Prestige configuration to your workstation For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on backup using TFTP note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP please see your Prestige manual Press ENTER to Exit 25 2 2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use get to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer for example get rom 0 config rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 25 2 3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 208 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 141 FTP Session Example 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in frp gt bin 200 Type I OK ftp gt get rom O zyxel rom 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp 16384 bytes sent i
164. hich is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 23 4 SNMP Traps The Prestige will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs Table 60 SNMP Traps menge sm links are down See the following table authenticationFailure defined in A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any RFC 1215 SNMP gets or sets requirements with wrong community password whyReboot defined in ZYXEL MIB A trap is sent with the reason of restart before an rebooting when the system is going to restart warm Start For intentional reboot A trap is sent with the message System reboot by user if reboot is done intentionally for example download new files Cl command sys reboot etc Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration 194 P 660R T Series User s Guide The port number is its interface index under the interface group Table 61 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits PORT PVC PERMANENT VIRTUAL CIRCUIT Ethernet LAN 195 Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 24 System Information and Diagnosis This chapter covers the information and diagnostic tools in SMT menus 24 1 to 24 4 24 1 Overview These tools i
165. hinm gt 00 3 00 Duration hh mm 00 OO Action Forced On Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel If a connection has been already established your Prestige will not drop it Once the connection is dropped manually or it times out then that remote node can t be triggered up until the end of the Duration Table 74 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Press SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Choose Yes and press ENTER to activate the schedule set Start Date Enter the start date when you wish the set to take effect in year month date format Valid dates are from the present to 2036 12 31 How Often Should this schedule set recur weekly or be used just once only Press the SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Once or Weekly Both these options are mutually exclusive If Once is selected then all weekday settings are N A When Once is selected the schedule rule deletes automatically after the scheduled time elapses Once If you selected Once in the How Often field above then enter the date the set should Date activate here in year month date format Weekday If you selected Weekly in the How Often field above then select the day s when the Day set should activate and recur by going to that day s and pressing SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER Start Time Enter the start time when you wish the schedule set to take effect in hour minute format Enter the maximum length of time this connection
166. igure 112 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule rrrnnennnrnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnn 176 Figure 113 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules r rrrnanonnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnn 176 Figure 114 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process rrrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnenanrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnne 178 FP NNN ee 179 Figure 116 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration rrrrrnnnrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnrnanernnnnnnnennnrnnnennnennnnrnnnennn 180 Figure 117 NetBIOS WAN Filter Rules Summary 180 Figure 118 NetBIOS LAN Filter Rules Summary 181 Figure 119 Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter TE 183 Foue TU S CD EE rnas 185 Figure 121 Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule REENEN 186 Figure 122 Protocol and Device Filter Sets A 187 20 P 660R T Series User s Guide Foue T23 Sampe Tanet FIRI ES 188 Figure 124 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter ccsccorcssccsassronesdarceseushearearcicecanatonuastoienseidtassasndiedacsevens 189 Figure 125 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter Rules Summary rrrnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 189 Figure 126 FN Ethemet Trame veke arae 190 Figure 127 Filtering Remote Node Traffic ccccecccceececseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeseeeesseeeseeeeeaeeeens 191 Figure 128 SNMP Management dee TONN 192 Figure 129 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration 193 Figure 130 Menu 24 System Maintenance rrrnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnvnnrnnnnrnvnnenvnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnuene 196 Figure 131 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status rrarrnnnrrnnnr
167. in Cell Rate SCR 0 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 My Login N A My Password N A ENET ENCAP Gateway N A IP Address Assignment Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel From menu 4 choose the SUA Only option from the Network Address Translation field This is the Many to One mapping discussed in Section 21 5 on page 170 The SUA Only read only option from the Network Address Translation field in menus 4 and 11 3 is specifically pre configured to handle this case 21 5 2 Example 2 Internet Access with an Inside Server Figure 104 NAT Example 2 Inside Local e L_ Addresses ILA 192 168 1 10 Inside Server l mi 192 168 1 10 Dynamic Inside Global Address In this case you do exactly as above use the convenient pre configured SUA Only set and also go to menu 15 2 to specify the inside server behind the NAT as shown in the next figure 171 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 105 Menu 15 2 1 Specifying an Inside Server Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Used for SUA Only Rule Start Port No End Port No IP Address L Default Default 192 168 1 10 2 O O 0 0 0 0 3 O O 0 0 0 0 4 O O 0 0 0 0 Da O O 0 0 0 0 6 O O GOD Pa O O 0 0 0 0 OG O O BEE o E D O O 0 0 0 0 10 O O 0 0 0 0 IIN O O 0 0 0 0 12 O O 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 21 5 3 Example
168. ing The Prestige uses the syslog facility to log the CDR Call Detail Record and system messages to a syslog server Syslog and accounting can be configured in Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance UNIX Syslog as shown next Figure 137 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance UNIX Syslog UNIX Syslog Active No Syslog IP Address Log Facility Local 1 Types CDR No Packet Triggered No Filter Log No PPP Log No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel You need to configure the UNIX syslog parameters described in the following table to activate syslog then choose what you want to log Table 64 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting PARAMETER DESCRIPTION UNIX Syslog Active Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to turn syslog on or off Syslog IP Address Type the IP address of your syslog server Log Facility Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select one of seven different local options The log facility lets you log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual 201 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 64 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting PARAMETER DESCRIPTION D Call Detail Record CDR logs all data phone line activity if set to Yes Packet Triggered The first 48 bytes or octets and protocol type of the triggering packet is sent to the UNIX syslog serve
169. ing procedures 1 Type 25 in the main menu to open Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup 2 Type the index of the policy set you want to configure to open Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 1 shows the summary of a policy set including the criteria and the action of a single policy and whether a policy is active or not Each policy contains two lines The former part is the criteria of the incoming packet and the latter is the action Between these two parts separator means the action is taken on criteria matched and separator means the action is taken on criteria not matched 229 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 155 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup A Criteria Action LY SKILL DAR ALS LS SP 20 20 DP 20 20 P 6 T NM PR 0 GW 192 168 1 1 T MT PR 0 Enter Policy Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Table 72 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup SP DA IP layer 4 protocol number TCP 6 UDP 17 MD um MR Type a number from 1 to 6 to display Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy see the next figure This menu allows you to configure a policy rule Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 230 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 156 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy Ment tAos dak TPVRO MEIN FPOLLCOY Policy Set Name test Active Yes EE EE LaS TR Protocol 6 Type of Service Normal Packet length 40 Precedence 0 Len Comp Not Equal So
170. ing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost The metric sets the priority for the Prestige s routes to the Internet If any two of the default routes have the same metric the Prestige uses the following pre defined priorities e Normal route designated by the ISP see Section 6 5 on page 68 e Traffic redirect route see Section 6 7 on page 71 e WAN backup route also called dial backup see Section 6 8 on page 72 For example if the normal route has a metric of 1 and the traffic redirect route has a metric of 2 and dial backup route has a metric of 3 then the normal route acts as the primary default route If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet the Prestige tries the traffic redirect route next In the same manner the Prestige uses the dial backup route if the traffic redirect route also fails If you want the dial backup route to take first priority over the traffic redirect route or even the normal route all you need to do is set the dial backup route s metric to 1 and the others to 2 or greater Note IP Policy Routing overrides the default routing behavior and takes priority over all of the routes mentioned above see Chapter 28 on page 228 Chapter 6 WAN Setup 66 P 660R T Series User s Guide 6 3 PPPo
171. ins how to configure the Prestige for traffic redirect and dial backup connections 15 2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2 From the main menu enter 2 to open menu 2 Figure 62 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Menu 2 Wan Backup Setup Check Mechanism DSL Link Check WAN IP Addressl 0 Check WAN IP Address2 Check WAN IP Address3 KeepAlive Fail Tolerance Recovery Interval sec 0 ICMP Timeout sec 0 Traffic Redirect No 0 on O Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 128 P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 38 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Check Mechanism Press SPACE BAR and then press ENTER to select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection Select DSL Link to have the Prestige check the DSL connection s physical layer Select ICMP to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields Check WAN IP Configure this field to test your Prestige s WAN accessibility Type the IP Address1 3 address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address When using a WAN backup connection the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection if configured if there is no response KeepAlive Fail Type the number of times 2 recommended that your Prestige may ping the IP Tolerance addres
172. install nor use your device during a thunderstorm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Do NOT store things on the device e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Safety Warnings 4 P 660R T Series User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions
173. ion SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table contains instructions on how to configure your Prestige for Internet access Table 43 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION ISP s Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider ISP This information is for identification purposes only Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR to select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP Choices are PPPoE PPPoA RFC 1483 or ENET ENCAP Multiplexing Press SPACE BAR to select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP Choices are VC based or LLC based VPI Enter the Virtual Path Identifier VPI assigned to you VCI Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI assigned to you ATM QoS Type Press SPACE BAR and select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR Variable Bit Rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR PCR Sustain Cell Rate Sustained Cell Rate is the mean cell rate of a bursty on off traffic source that can SCR be sent at the peak rate and a parameter for burst traffic Type the SCR it must be less than the PCR Maximum Burst Refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type
174. is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway 3 2 1 1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP then the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A If you have a static IP then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the ENET ENCAP Gateway field 3 2 1 2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP Address Assignment must be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above 3 2 1 3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation 47 In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your ISP However for a dynamic IP the Prestige acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A as the DHCP server assigns them to the Prestige Chapter 3 Wizard Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide 3 2 1 4 Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you ca
175. is allowed in hour minute format 239 Chapter 29 Call Scheduling P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 74 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Action Forced On means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and will persist for the time period specified in the Duration field Forced Down means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line Enable Dial On Demand means that this schedule permits a demand call on the line Disable Dial On Demand means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Once your schedule sets are configured you must then apply them to the desired remote node s Enter 11 from the Main Menu and then enter the target remote node index Using SPACE BAR select PPPoE or PPPOA in the Encapsulation field and then press ENTER to make the schedule sets field available as shown next Figure 165 Applying Schedule Set s to a Remote Node PPPoE Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP Active Yes Bridge No Encapsulation PPPoA Edit IP Bridge No Multiplexing LLC based Edit ATM Options No Service Name N A Edit Advance Options N A Incoming Telco Option Rem Login Allocated Budget min 0 Rem
176. k devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the Prestige Refer to Section 6 5 on page 75 for more information Figure 52 Any IP Table Any IP Table IP Address MAC Address 192 168 10 1 O0 50 ba ad 4f 81 Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays the index number IP Address This field displays the IP address of the network device Chapter 12 Maintenance 112 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 28 Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed IP address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Click Refresh to update this screen 12 5 Diagnostic Screens These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige 12 5 1 Diagnostic General Screen Click Diagnostic and then General to open the screen shown next Figure 53 Diagnostic General Diagnostic General Pesailving 192 see sss SUES See sd SS Reply from 192 shee si 32 Reply from 192 168 11 33 Reply from 192 168 1 33 Ping Host Successful TCP IP Address Ping System Reset system 113 Chapter 12 Maintenance P 660R T Series
177. les and set your computer IP address 271 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig ethO configuration file where ethno is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor e Ifyou have a dynamic IP address enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO field The following figure shows an example Figure 192 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE ethO ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO dhcp USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet e Ifyou have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type I PADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Figure 193 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE ethO ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet 2 If you know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 194 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configur
178. line quality etc Models ending in 1 for example P 660R T1 denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Models ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN Integrated Synchronous Digital System Models ending in 7 denote a device that works over T ISDN UR 2 Note Only use firmware for your Prestige s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige The web browser based Graphical User Interface GUI provides easy management 1 1 1 Features of the Prestige The following sections describe the features of the Prestige Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 32 P 660R T Series User s Guide 33 High Speed Internet Access Your Prestige ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 router can support downstream transmission rates of up to 24Mbps and upstream transmission rates of 3 5Mbps Actual speeds attained depend on ISP DSLAM environment Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you connect and turn on the Prestige it automatically detects the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes In cases where additional account information such as an Internet account user name and password 1s required or the Prestige cannot connect to the ISP you will be redirected to web screen s for information input or troubleshooting Any IP The Any IP feature allows a computer
179. ll in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields 263 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide e Click Advanced Figure 181 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration Tou can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 8 Obtain an IF address automatically O Use the following IP address 8 Obtain ONS server address automatically O Use the following DNS server addresses 6 If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses e In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add e In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add e Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add e Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways e In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric e Click Add e Repeat the previous three
180. llocated Budget min N A Rem Password N A Period hr N A Outgoing Schedule Sets N A My Login N A Nailed Up Connection N A My Password N A Session Options Authen N A Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP Bridge field then press SPACE BAR to set the value to Yes and press ENTER to edit Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Figure 91 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options LP vOp ELON Ss Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min 0 Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 My WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT Full Feature Address Mapping Set 2 Metric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B Multicast IGMP v2 IP Policies Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Table 48 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Bridge menu 11 1 Make sure this field is set to Yes 159 Chapter 20 Bridging Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 48 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Fields continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Edit IP Bridge menu 11 1 Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display menu 11 3 Ethernet Addr Timeout Type the time in minutes for the Prestige to retain the Ethernet Address min menu 11 3 information in its internal tables while the line is down If
181. llowing table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Type Each of these labels denotes a service that you may use to remotely manage the Prestige Access Status Select the access interface Choices are All LAN Only WAN Only and Disable Port This field shows the port number for the remote management service You may change the port number for a service in this field but you must use the same port number to use that service for remote management Secured Client The default 0 0 0 0 allows any client to use this service to remotely manage the IP Prestige Type an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address Apply Click Apply to save your settings back to the Prestige Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration 94 P 660R T Series User s Guide 95 Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator 11 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network
182. load 115 upload error 117 Frame Relay 36 France Contact Information 6 FTP 80 92 225 Restrictions 225 FTP File Transfer 213 FTP Restrictions 92 209 FTP Server 173 Full Rate 282 G Gas Pipes 4 Gateway 156 Gateway Node 160 General Setup 124 Generic filter 187 Germany Contact Information 6 Graphical User Interface GUI 32 H hardware problem 242 Hidden Menus 120 High Voltage Points 4 Hop Count 147 156 Host 56 Host IDs 274 HTTP 81 HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol 115 IANA 48 Idle timeout 145 IGMP 61 IGMP support 147 Install UPnP 98 Windows Me 98 Windows XP 99 Interactive Applications 228 Internet Access 33 37 136 139 140 Internet access 44 136 Internet Access Setup 162 244 Internet access wizard setup 45 Internet Assigned Numbers AuthoritySee IANA 48 IP Address 46 60 80 111 134 156 160 183 199 204 230 IP Address Assignment 47 ENET ENCAP 47 PPPoA or PPPoE 47 RFC 1483 47 IP Addressing 274 IP alias 35 136 IP Alias Setup 137 IP Classes 274 IP Filter 185 P 660R T Series User s Guide Logic Flow 184 IP mask 183 IP Packet 185 IP Policies 232 IP policy 136 IP policy routing 228 IP Policy Routing IPPR 35 136 Applying an IP Policy 232 Ethernet IP Policies 232 Gateway 232 IP Pool Setup 52 IP Protocol 231 IP protocol 228 IP Routing Policy IPPR 228 Benefits 228 Cost Savings 228 Criteria 228 Load Sharing 228 Setup 229 IP Static Route 154
183. log into your device Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 246 P 660R T Series User s Guide Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 30 9 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 166 Pop up Blocker Mail and News k Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize PENERE EE Windows Update Windows Messenger You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 167 Internet Options Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet ll Zone Hedium Blocks third party cookies that do not have compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without pour implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker e Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups
184. low Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play sound when pop up i blocked Show Information Bar when pop up it blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAL 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting 30 9 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 249 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 170 Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings F FAT amp 0 Ge Internet Localintranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you Cree havent placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone z Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Actives controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites Custom Level D Default Level OF Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under
185. ls These filters are always enabled and not accessible to you Your Prestige applies the built in filters first and then the user defined call filters if applicable as shown next Figure 114 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process Ide fina Doppa Dogppada padet flirerdu flrerdu F F j Sdpaddt Sdad bt dorct rest ht brad rest Ide Tiner Ide Tiner Two sets of factory filter rules have been configured in menu 21 to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls A summary of their filter rules is shown in the figures that follow The following figure illustrates the logic flow when executing a filter rule Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 178 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 115 Filter Rule Process Packet intoFilter v Fetch First Filter Set Filter Set y gt Fetch Next Fetch First Filter Set Filter Rule A Fetch Next Filter Rule gt Yes A Yes Next filter Next Filter Se Available No No Active Yes v Execute N e Filter Rule Check Next Rule Forward Drop Drop Packet Accept Packet You can apply up to four filter sets to a particular port to block various types of packets Because each filter set can have up to six rules you can hav
186. lter set s as appropriate You can cascade up to four filter sets by typing their numbers separated by commas The factory default filter set Net BIOS WAN is inserted in the protocol filters field under Call Filter Sets in menu 11 5 to block local NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls to the ISP Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 190 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 127 Filtering Remote Node Traffic Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters 3 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Call Filter Sets protocol filters 2 Device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Note that call filter sets are visible when you select PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation 191 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 23 SNMP Configuration This chapter explains SNMP Configuration menu 22 23 1 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network The Prestige supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two c SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 128 SNMP Management Model MANAGER Manag
187. may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 7 3 1 Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen Note If you do not assign an IP address in Server Set 1 default server the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup 7 3 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Table 16 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO FTP File Trans
188. me 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray 103 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 44 System Tray Icon A i Internet Connection is now connected Click here For more information Upnp2 Paint 7 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 45 Internet Connection Status Y Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Connected 00 00 56 100 0 Mbps Status Duration Speed Activity Internet Internet Gateway Mu Computer Packets Sent H Feceved 943 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the Prestige without finding out the IP address of the Prestige first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Prestige Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 104 105 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 46 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back K p Search fr Folders Hab Address Ve Network
189. me GMT Daylight Saving If you use daylight savings time then choose Yes Start Date If using daylight savings time enter the month and day that it starts on End Date If using daylight savings time enter the month and day that it ends on When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 26 3 1 Resetting the Time 221 Chapter 26 System Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide The Prestige resets the time in three instances e On leaving menu 24 10 after making changes e When the Prestige starts up if there is a timeserver configured in menu 24 10 e 24 hour intervals after starting Chapter 26 System Maintenance 222 P 660R T Series User s Guide 223 Chapter 26 System Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 27 Remote Management This chapter covers remote management SMT menu 24 11 27 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which Prestige interface if any from which computers 27 2 Remote Management To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field Enter 11 from menu 24 to display Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control 27 2 1 Remote Management Setup You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via the Internet WAN only the LAN only All
190. means to check the next rule m Action Matched F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules D means to drop the packet N means to check the next rule 181 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide The protocol dependent filter rules abbreviation are listed as follows Table 55 Rule Abbreviations Used men Source Address Source Port Number De bestnatonPorNumber oa 22 4 Configuring a Filter Rule To configure a filter rule type its number in Menu 21 x Filter Rules Summary and press ENTER to open menu 21 x 1 for the rule There are two types of filter rules TCP IP and Generic Depending on the type of rule the parameters for each type will be different Use SPACE BAR to select the type of rule that you want to create in the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open the respective menu To speed up filtering all rules in a filter set must be of the same class for instance protocol filters or generic filters The class of a filter set is determined by the first rule that you create When applying the filter sets to a port separate menu fields are provided for protocol and device filter sets If you include a protocol filter set in a device filters field or vice versa the Prestige will warn you and will not allow you to save 22 4 1 TCP IP Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a TCP IP filter rule TCP IP rules allow you
191. menu 21 Figure 117 NetBIOS WAN Filter Rules Summary Menu 21 2 Filter Rules Summary Filter Rules it il 2 3 4 5 6 Enter Filt r Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 180 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 118 NetBIOS LAN Filter Rules Summary Menu 21 1 3 Filter Rules Summary A Type Filter Rules Mmn 1 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 137 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 53 NDF 2 N 3 N 4 N 3N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure 22 3 Filter Rules Summary Menus The following tables briefly describe the abbreviations used in menus 21 1 1 and 21 1 2 Table 54 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu DESCRIPTION The filter rule number 1 to 6 Active Y means the rule is active N means the rule is inactive The type of filter rule GEN for Generic IP for TCP IP Filter Rules These parameters are displayed here M Y means there are more rules to check which form a rule chain with the present rule An action cannot be taken until the rule chain is complete N means there are no more rules to check You can specify an action to be taken for instance forward the packet drop the packet or check the next rule For the latter the next rule is independent of the rule just checked Action Not Matched F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules D means to drop the packet N
192. mp Equal TCP Estab No More No Log None Action Matched Drop Action Not Matched Forward Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Figure 125 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter Rules Summary Menu 21 1 6 Filter Rules Summary Filter Rules Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 23 it 1 2 3 4 5 6 Enter Filter Rul Number 1 6 to Configure 1 This shows you that you have configured and activated A Y a TCP IP filter rule Type IP Pr 6 for destination telnet ports DP 23 M N means an action can be taken immediately The action is to drop the packet m D if the action is matched and to forward the packet immediately n F if the action is not matched no matter whether there are more rules to be checked there aren t in this example After you have created the filter set you must apply it 1 Enter 11 in the main menu to display menu 11 and type the remote node number to edit 2 Go to the Edit Filter Sets field press SPACE BAR to choose Yes and press ENTER 3 This brings you to menu 11 5 Apply the example filter set for example filter set 3 in this menu as shown in the next section 189 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide 22 7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults This section shows you where to apply the filter s after you design it them Sets of factory default filter rules have been configured in menu 21 but have not been applied to filter traffic Table 58 Fil
193. n addr start 0 0 0 0 end N A port start 20 end 21 Action Matched Gateway addr 192 168 1 100 Log No Type of Service No Change Precedence No Change Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 6 Check Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup to see if the rule is added correctly 7 Apply both policy sets in menu 3 2 as shown next 235 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 162 Applying IP Policies Example Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 197 166 iea Size of Client IP Pool 64 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction Both Version RIP 1 Multicast None IP Policies 1 2 Edit IP Alias No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 236 P 660R T Series User s Guide 237 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Call Scheduling Call scheduling applicable for PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation only allows you to dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long 29 1 Introduction The call scheduling feature allows the Prestige to manage a remote node and dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long This feature is similar to the scheduler in a videocassette recorder you can specify a time period for the VCR to record
194. n 1 10Seconds 297 89Kbytes sec ftp gut 25 2 4 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 67 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 25 2 5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations TFTP FTP and Telnet over WAN will not work when e You have disabled Telnet service in menu 24 11 e You have applied a filter in menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN to block Telnet service e The IP address in the Secured Client IP field in menu 24 11 does not match the client IP If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the Telnet session immediately e You have an SMT console session running 209 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide 25 2 6 Backup Configuration Using TFTP The Prestige supports the up downloading of the
195. n assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 3 2 2 Nailed Up Connection PPP A nailed up connection is a dial up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand The Prestige does two things when you specify a nailed up connection The first is that idle timeout is disabled The second is that the Prestige will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down A nailed up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons Do not specify a nailed u
196. n one network to a different IP address known within another network 7 1 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Prestige for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet 1s traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 14 NAT Definitions DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN This refers to the host on the WAN This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN Note NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host Chapter 7 Network Address Translation
197. n the LAN Setup screen Chapter 5 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide 5 4 LAN TCP IP The Prestige has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability 5 4 1 Factory LAN Defaults The LAN parameters of the Prestige are preset in the factory with the following values e IP address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits e DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured 5 4 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask Refer to Section 3 2 on page 46 in Chapter 3 on page 44 for this information 5 4 3 RIP Setup RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to e Both the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives e In Only the Prestige will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received e Out Only the Prestige will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received e None the Prestige will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field c
198. nclude updates on system status port status log and trace capabilities and upgrades for the system software This chapter describes how to use these tools in detail Type 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance as shown in the following figure Figure 130 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 System Maintenance System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode 2 Gall ee eeh O Time and Date Setting 1 Remote Management L ep om 4 D Os cs Ss 9 1 il Enter Menu Selection Number 24 2 System Status The first selection System Status gives you information on the status and statistics of the ports as shown next System Status is a tool that can be used to monitor your Prestige Specifically it gives you information on your DSL telephone line status number of packets sent and received To get to System Status type 24 to go to Menu 24 System Maintenance From this menu type 1 System Status There are two commands in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Entering 1 resets the counters ESC takes you back to the previous screen Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 196 P 660R T Series User s Guide 197 The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status which are read only and meant for diagnostic purp
199. nd then double click System Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name e In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the Prestige via DHCP 14 2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1 Enter 1 in the Main Menu to open Menu 1 General Setup shown next Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup 124 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 60 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup System Name Location Contact Person s Name Domain Name Edit Dynamic DNS No Route IP Yes Bridge No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Fill in the required fields Refer to the table shown next for more information about these fields Table 36 Menu 1 General Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Location optional Enter the geographi
200. ned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 3 1 2 2 LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 3 1 3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI numbers assigned to you The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Please see the appendix for more information 3 1 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen In the SITE MAP screen click Wizard Setup to display the first wizard screen 45 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen Wizard rn ISP Parameters for Internet Access E Routing 1 Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplex LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI emm vCl op o The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode From the Mode drop down list
201. nisjeeisraik ev ukene 137 Figure 53 Menu 3 2 1 IF Alas BE 138 Figure 70 Menu 1 General Setup EE NR 139 Figure 71 Menu A Internet Access Setup rrrnrrnnnrrnnrrnnnvvnnrnannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenne 140 Figure 72 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup ME 143 Figure 73 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile 144 Figure 74 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 146 Figure 75 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP IP LAN to LAN Connection rrrrranrnanennnrnnnnn 148 Figure 76 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation 148 Figure 77 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation 149 FOR To Mernel NN aars iaa aaa toes sadeencucnianieinet 149 Figure 79 Menu 21 Filer Set Configuration cccccccsecccececeecceeecceeecueeceeeceueeeeeeseeeseeesees 150 P 660R T Series User s Guide FE EE NEE 150 Fe GE PE EEE SNE 150 Figure 82 Menu 11 6 for VC based Multiplexing A 151 Figure 83 Menu 11 6 for LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation rarrrnnnrnnnnrnnnnr 152 Figure 84 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile rrrrnrrvnnrrrnnnnrvnrrrnnrrnnnrrnvnnenrnnnnnnnennnnrnnnnnennnnen 152 Figure 85 Menu 11 6 Advance Setup Options Lummnsmnimemsennvsmemsssilsemlndpesinnvnekint 153 Figure 86 Sample Static Routing Topology 154 Figure 87 Menu 12 Static Route Setup ENEE 155 Figure 88 Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup E 155 Figure 89 Menu12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route esseismmenaenndamun
202. nnennnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnanenanrnnnnnnannnnnnnanennnrnnnnnnanennsnnnnnnnnsnnneen 125 24 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 37 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DOINGS siciicscinvicsiniaiserisisisiievesnnstisasuecieneieivcuess 126 Table 38 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup sesctiicisecsscvacssdaascusnisicaeevnanscaosavacksasasdouaceanenereabsaaonenads 129 Table 39 Menu 2 1Traffic Redirect Setup arrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnannnanennnrnnnnnnnsen 130 PST PENN WEE 134 Table 41 TCP IP Ethernet Setup EE 134 EEE GJE PE 138 Table 43 Menu 4 Internet ACCESS Setup rrarrnnnrnnnnanenannnnnnnnnnannnnnnanennnnnnnnnernnsnnnsnusenannnesene 140 Table 44 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile 144 Table 45 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options rrrnreranernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 146 Table 46 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options rranrnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnernnrnnnnennnnnnen 153 Table 47 Menu12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route EE 156 Table 48 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Fields 159 Table 49 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route rrrrrranenannnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnanennsnnnnnanennnnnnnnnnenneene 160 Table 50 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 ten geeueeebree AER aha 164 Table 51 SUA Address Mapping Rules rrrnnnenanenanennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenanennnennnnennne 165 Tabie RT AN Ee EE 167 Table 53 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule ina Set ou eee 168 Table 54 Abbreviations Used in
203. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnrnanenanennnrnnnnnnnsnnnnen 288 el Es Re PR ENER 289 TENT re 289 TODE lee er ad LODS EE 290 Ze EE EE eege 290 TTS prs 290 26 P 660R T Series User s Guide 21 P 660R T Series User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the Prestige 660R Tx P 660R Tx ADSL2 Ethernet Gateway Note Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Your Prestige is easy to install and configure About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your Prestige for its various applications The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by web configurator The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by web configurator Note Use the web configurator System Management Terminal SMT or command interpreter interface to configure your Prestige Not all features can be configured through all interfaces Syntax Conventions Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one predefined choices The SMT menu titles and labels are in Bold Times New Roman font Predefined field choices are in Bold Arial font Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means
204. nnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 197 Figure 132 Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed rrrrnrrrarenarrnnnrnnnnn 198 Figure 133 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information rrrrerrranernnrrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 199 Figure 134 Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed 200 Figure 135 Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace rrrarennnnnnannrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 200 Figure 136 Sample Error and Information Messages rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnennnnennnnen 201 Figure 137 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting aannannannnnnaannann 201 Foure 136 NR sjanse 202 Figure 139 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic arrrnnrnnarrnannnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 204 Figure 140 Telnet in Menu 24 5 oscicscncesaseavecconcsisscccetactaseciendaessnsnsanotasnandunasaseciedtanasncectenenaesees 208 Foure 141 FIF Session EXampiG rei 209 Figure 142 Tenet into Menu ageet 212 Figure 143 Restore Using FTP Session Example rrarrnnnreranernnrnanrvnnrnnnnnrarnnannnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnennn 212 Figure 144 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware rrrnnrernnennnrnnnnnnnnnvnnrnnnennn 213 Figure 145 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance rrurrnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 214 Figure 146 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload rurrnnnnnannnnnonnnrnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 215 Figure 147 Command Mode in Menu 24 2pu esemennesmmasmimeee
205. nt will be installed To see what s Included in component click Details subcomponents of Networking Services E nmen raa mm SSS SSE A in Zi RIP Listener C d i Simple TCP IP Services OL wi e Universal Plug and Play emm DMB Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required UU MB Space available on disk 260 8 ME nes Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 100 P 660R T Series User s Guide 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 11 4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Prestige Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Prestige Turn on your computer and the Prestige Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway 2 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 40 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back GE 3 Jo Search K Folders Address e Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks sj Create a new connection wei Set up a home or small office network Wi Disable this network device Cu Rename this conn
206. nter the month and day that your daylight savings time ends on if you selected Daylight Savings Synchronize Select this option to have your Prestige use the time server that you configured system clock with above to set its internal system clock Time Server now Please wait for up to 60 seconds while the Prestige locates the time server If the Prestige cannot find the time server please check the time server protocol and its IP address If the IP address was entered correctly try pinging it for example to test the connection Date This field displays the date of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server New Date yyyy This field displays the last updated date from the time server mm dd When you select None in the Use Protocol when Bootup field enter the new date in this field and then click Apply me 1 gt This field displays the time of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server When you select None in the Use Protocol when Bootup field enter the new time in this field and then click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 9 Time and Date P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Remote Management Configura
207. o specify a range of ports enter the last port to be forwarded in the End Port No field 5 Enter the inside IP address of the server in the IP Address field In the following figure you have a computer acting as an FTP Telnet and SMTP server ports 21 23 and 25 at 192 168 1 33 6 Press ENTER at the Press ENTER to confirm prompt to save your configuration after you define all the servers or press ESC at any time to cancel 169 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 101 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example FTP Telnet SMTP Server 192 168 1 33 r H UI 192 168 1 1 ON Internet B 192 168 1 35 C 192 168 1 36 IP address assigned by ISP 21 5 General NAT Examples The following are some examples of NAT configuration 21 5 1 Example 1 Internet Access Only In the following Internet access example you only need one rule where your ILAs Inside Local addresses all map to one dynamic IGA Inside Global Address assigned by your ISP Figure 102 NAT Example 1 Inside Local Addresses ILA Internet Dynamic Inside Global Address Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 170 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 103 Menu 4 Internet Access amp NAT Example Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based VPI 8 VCI 35 ATM QoS Type UBR Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 Susta
208. oducing the Web Configurator 42 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary continued LINK SUB LINK WAN WAN Setup WAN Backup SUA Only Full Feature Dynamic DNS Time and Date Remote Management Maintenance FUNCTION Use this screen to change the Prestige s WAN remote node settings Use this screen to configure your traffic redirect properties and WAN backup settings Use this screen to configure servers behind the Prestige Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules Use this screen to configure Internet security and apply the predefined filter rules Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Use this screen to change your Prestige s time and date Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet FTP Web to manage the Prestige Use this screen to enable UPnP on the Prestige System Status DHCP Table Any IP Table Diagnostic General DSL Line Firmware LOGOUT 43 This screen contains administrative and system related information This screen displays DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol related information and is READ ONLY This screen shows current read only information of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the Prestige These screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige general connection
209. omponents The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 259 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660R T Series User s Guide 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab If your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically If you have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 175 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties E x Bindings Advanced Nemos DNS Configuration G
210. on Internet Access 33 ZyNOS 207 P 660R T Series User s Guide ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 206 ZyNOS F W Version 207 ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 5 302
211. on the network layer IP address Bridging allows the Prestige to transport packets of network layer protocols that it does not route for example SNA from one network to another The caveat is that compared to routing bridging generates more traffic for the same network layer protocol and it also demands more CPU cycles and memory For efficiency reasons do not turn on bridging unless you need to support protocols other than IP on your network For IP enable the routing if you need it do not bridge what the Prestige can route 20 2 Bridge Ethernet Setup Basically all non local packets are bridged to the WAN Your Prestige does not support IPX 20 2 1 Remote Node Bridging Setup Follow the procedure in another section to configure the protocol independent parameters in Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile For bridging related parameters you need to configure Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 1 To setup Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options shown in the next figure follow these steps 2 In menu 11 1 make sure the Bridge field is set to Yes Chapter 20 Bridging Setup 158 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 90 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name Route IP Active Yes Bridge Yes Encapsulation ENET ENCAP Edit IP Bridge Yes Multiplexing VC based Edit ATM Options No Service Name N A Edit Advance Options N A Incoming Telco Option Rem Login N A A
212. onnections My Network Places Properties Example Cal Prestige 660R T3 1 Internet Sharing Gateway General Si EL Prestige EEDR 13 T Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer WHEL Model Name WHEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Prestige EEDR T3 T7 Description WHEL Prestige GbOR T3 T 7 Internet Sharing Gate Device Address hitps 192 160 11 Close Cancel Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 106 P 660R T Series User s Guide 107 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Maintenance This chapter displays system information such as ZyNOS firmware port IP addresses and port traffic statistics 12 1 Maintenance Overview The maintenance screens can help you view system information upload new firmware manage configuration and restart your Prestige 12 2 System Status Screen Click System Status to open the following screen where you can use to monitor your Prestige Note that these fields are READ ONLY and only for diagnostic purposes Chapter 12 Maintenance 108 P 660R T Series User s Guide 109 Figure 49 System Status System Status System Status System Mame P660R T3 TF ANOS FA Version V3 40 ACM 0 11 05 2005 DSL FY Version DMT wer 3 1 0 4 BTC H ver T14F7_0 0 Sstandard kulti Mode WAN Information IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VPIVCIOI 35
213. ontrols the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Chapter 5 LAN Setup 60 P 660R T Series User s Guide 5 4 4 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version RFC 1112 but IGMP version I is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent
214. oses Figure 131 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status USt 0529 Sat Jan 01 2000 Node Lnk Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B s Rx B s Up Time L PPPOE Idle O 0 O 0 0 0 00 00 2 N A 0 0 0 0 00 00 e N A 0 0 0 0 0 Oe 00300 4 N A 0 0 0 0 0 200 00 3 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0700 00 6 N A 0 0 0 0 0 09 00 00 7 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 N A 0 0 0 0 0 02 0000 My WAN TP irom ISP 0 0 0 0 Ethernet WAN Status 100M Full Duplex Tx Pkts 23216 Line Status Down Collisions H Rx Pkts 23740 Upstream Speed 0 kbps CPU Load LEG Downstream Speed 0 kbps Press Command COMMANDS 1 Reset Counters ESC Exit The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Table 62 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status My WAN IP This is the IP address of the ISP remote node from ISP Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 62 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status continued FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN This shows statistics for the WAN Line Status This shows the current status of the xDSL line which can be Up or Down Upstream This shows the upstream transfer rate in kbps Speed This shows the downstream transfer rate in kbps Speed CPU Load This specifies the percentage of CPU utilization 24 3 System Information To get to the System Information 1 Enter 24 to display Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 Enter 2 to displ
215. ot Matched Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged Both All packets will be logged Action Select the action for a matching packet Choices are Check Next Rule Forward or Matched Drop Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 186 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 57 Menu 21 1 5 1 Generic Filter Rule continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Action Not Select the action for a packet not matching the rule Choices are Check Next Rule Matched Forward or Drop When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 22 5 Filter Types and NAT There are two classes of filter rules Generic Filter Device rules and Protocol Filter TCP IP rules Generic Filter rules act on the raw data from to LAN and WAN Protocol Filter rules act on IP packets When NAT Network Address Translation is enabled the inside IP address and port number are replaced on a connection by connection basis which makes it impossible to know the exact address and port on the wire Therefore the Prestige applies the protocol filters to the native IP address and port number before NAT for outgoing packets and after NAT for incoming packets On the other hand the generic or device filters are applied to the raw packets that appear on the wire They are applied at the point where the Prestige is receiving and sending the p
216. our connection up all the time Connection The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Connect on Demand Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Chapter 6 WAN Setup 70 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 12 WAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand The default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout PPPoE Passthrough This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation PPPoE In addition to the Prestige s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass encapsulation only through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation ENET ENCAP Refer to Appendix C on page 274 in the to calculate a subnet mask If you are encapsulation only implementing subnetting ENET ENCAP You must specify a gateway IP address supplied b
217. own next 125 Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 61 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG Active Yes Host me dyndns org EMAIL mail mailserver USER username Password KKKKKKKK Enable Wildcard No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Follow the instructions in the next table to configure dynamic DNS parameters Table 37 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS FIELD DESCRIPTION This is the name of your dynamic DNS service provider Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to make dynamic DNS active Enter the domain name assigned to your Prestige by your dynamic DNS provider EMAIL Enter your e mail address Enter the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Your Prestige supports DYNDNS Wildcard Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes or No This field is N A when you choose DDNS client as your service provider When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup 126 P 660R T Series User s Guide 127 Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup This chapter describes how to configure traffic redirect using menu 2 and 2 1 15 1 Introduction to WAN Backup Setup This chapter expla
218. p connection unless your telephone company offers flat rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern 3 2 3 NAT NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 3 2 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup Second Screen The second wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use All screens shown are with routing mode Configure the fields and click Next to continue Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 48 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 7 Internet Connection with PPPoE Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access Service Name User Name user icp ch Password p IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ge Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 ser Nailed Up Connection Connection Network Address Translation SUA Orly D The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPoE Type the name of your PPPoE service here User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Enter the password associated with the user name above IP Addre
219. pping Sets Now les look at option 1 in menu 15 1 Enter 1 to bring up this menu We ll just look at the differences from the previous menu Note the extra Action and Select Rule fields mean you can configure rules in this screen Note also that the in the Set Name field means that this is a required field and you must enter a name for the set Note Menu 15 1 1 First Set Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name ACL Default Set Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type ile 2 oF 4 Ja 6 Ts 8 om 0x H Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Note If the Set Name field is left blank the entire set will be deleted The Type Local and Global Start End IPs are configured in menu 15 1 1 1 described later and the values are displayed here Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 166 P 660R T Series User s Guide 21 3 1 3 Ordering Your Rules Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be r
220. pset Displays the vendor of the ADSL chipset and DSL version Vendor Standard This refers to the operational protocol the Prestige and the DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer are using io Refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control of your Prestige This field shows the DHCP setting None Relay or Server of the Prestige 24 3 2 Console Port Speed 199 You can set up different port speeds for the console port through Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Console Port Speed Your Prestige supports 9600 default 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the desired speed in menu 24 2 2 as shown in the following figure Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 134 Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed Console Port Speed 9600 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 24 4 Log and Trace There are two logging facilities in the Prestige The first 1s the error logs and trace records that are stored locally The second is the syslog facility for message logging 24 4 1 Viewing Error Log The first place you should look for clues when something goes wrong is the error log Follow the procedures to view the local error trace log 1 Type 24 in the main menu to display Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 From menu 24 type 3 to display Menu 24 3
221. pter 30 Troubleshooting 242 P 660R T Series User s Guide 30 3 Problems with the Password Table 77 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot The username is admin The default password is 1234 The Password and access the Username fields are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password Prestige and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file Refer to Section 2 2 on page 41 in Chapter 2 on page 40 This restores all of the factory defaults including the password 30 4 Problems with the DSL LED Table 78 Troubleshooting the DSL LED PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The DSL LED is Check the telephone wire and connections between the Prestige DSL port and the off wall jack Make sure that the telephone company has checked your phone line and set it up for DSL service Reset your ADSL line to reinitialize your link to the DSLAM For details refer to Chapter 12 on page 108 web configurator or Chapter 24 on page 196 SMT 30 5 Problems with the LAN Interface Table 79 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot access the If the 10M 100M LEDs on the front panel are both off refer to Section 30 2 on Prestige from the page 242 LAN Make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and your computer s are on the same subnet
222. r a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Prestige for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Prestige and renames it ras Similarly put config rom rom 0 transfers the configuration file on your computer config rom to the Prestige and renames it rom 0 Likewise get rom 0 config xrom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt Note The Prestige automatically restarts after a successful file upload Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 214 P 660R T Series User s Guide 25 4 4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Figure 146 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp gt bin 200 Type I OK ftp gt put firmware bin ras 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp 1103936 bytes sent in 1 10Seconds 297 89Kbytes sec ftp gt quit More commands found in GUI based FTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter Refer to Section 25 2 5 on page 209 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN
223. r when this field is set to Yes Filter Log No filters are logged when this field is set to No Filters with the individual filter Log field set to Yes are logged when this field is set to Yes PPP Log PPP events are logged when this field is set to Yes When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel O 70 The following are examples of the four types of syslog messages sent by the Prestige Figure 138 Syslog Example 1 CDR SdcmdSyslogsend SYSLOG CDR SYSLOG INFO String String board xx Line xx channel XX Call xx SEL board the hardware board ID line the WAN ID in a board Channel channel ID within the WAN call the call reference number which starts from 1 and increments by 1 for each new Cadi str COL Outgoing Call d v xx ch xx dev device No ch channel No C01 Incoming Call xxxxBps xxxxx L2TP xxxxx Remote Call ID COL Incoming Call xxxx connected speed xxxxx Remote Call ID LO2 Tunnel Connected L2TP C02 OutCall Connected xxxx connected speed xxxxx Remote Call ID c02 CLID call refused LO2 Call Terminated C02 Call Terminated Jul 19 11 19 27 192 1634102 2 ZYXEL board 0 bene 0 channel 0 Fall Ty COL OQurgoing Call dev 2 ch 0 40002 Jul 19 11 19 32 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C02 OutCall Connected 64000 40002 Jul 19 11 20
224. rations and return to the factory defaults Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Firmware Upgrade DescRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Reset Click this button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the Prestige to its factory defaults Refer to Section 2 2 on page 41 Note Do not turn off the Prestige while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the Prestige again The Prestige automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 56 Network Temporarily Disconnected A Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the System Status screen Chapter 12 Maintenance 116 P 660R T Series User s Guide If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Back to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 57 Error Message Error Message ERROR FAIL TO UPD
225. rect your Prestige should connect automatically to the Internet If the connection fails note the error message that you receive on the screen and take the appropriate troubleshooting steps 141 Chapter 17 Internet Access P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Remote Node Configuration This chapter covers remote node configuration 18 1 Remote Node Setup Overview This section describes the protocol independent parameters for a remote node remote node is required for placing calls to a remote gateway remote node represents both the remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection When you use menu 4 to set up Internet access you are configuring one of the remote nodes You first choose a remote node in Menu 11 Remote Node Setup You can then edit that node s profile in menu 11 1 as well as configure specific settings in three submenus edit IP and bridge options in menu 11 3 edit ATM options in menu 11 6 and edit filter sets in menu 11 5 18 2 Remote Node Setup This section describes the protocol independent parameters for a remote node 18 2 1 Remote Node Profile To configure a remote node follow these steps 1 From the main menu enter 11 to display Menu 11 Remote Node Setup 2 When menu 11 appears as shown in the following figure type the number of the remote node that you want to configure Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 142 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 72 Menu
226. require separate IP network numbers for the WAN and LAN links and each end to have a unique address within the WAN network number In that case type the IP address assigned to the WAN port Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 146 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 45 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Address Mapping Set When Full Feature is selected in the NAT field configure address mapping sets in menu 15 1 Select one of the NAT server sets 2 10 in menu 15 2 see Chapter 21 on page 162 for details and type that number here When SUA Only is selected in the NAT field the SMT uses NAT server set 1 in menu 15 2 see Chapter 21 on page 162 for details not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Private This determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast If No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP Direction Options are Both In Only Out Only or None Version Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP version Options are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Multicast IGMP v1 sets IGMP to version 1 IGMP v2 sets IGMP to version 2 and None disables IGMP IP Policies You can apply up to fo
227. ress Mapping Rules set Name SUA Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 M 1 0 0 0 0 Server d 2 3 4 P 6 7 8 9 O Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table explains the fields in this menu Note Menu 15 1 255 is read only Table 51 SUA Address Mapping Rules FIELD DESCRIPTION Set Name This is the name of the set you selected in menu 15 1 or enter the name of a new set you want to create Idx This is the index or rule number Local Start IP Local Start IP is the starting local IP address ILA Local End IP Local End IP is the ending local IP address ILA If the rule is for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0 0 0 0 and the End IP is 255 255 255 255 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 51 SUA Address Mapping Rules continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA If you have a dynamic IP enter 0 0 0 0 as the Global Start IP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address IGA Type These are the mapping types Server allows us to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this machine See later for some examples When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 21 3 1 2 User Defined Address Ma
228. restige Enter an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 27 2 2 Remote Management Limitations 225 Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when e A filter in menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN is applied to block a Telnet FTP or Web service e You have disabled that service in menu 24 11 e The IP address in the Secured Client IP field menu 24 11 does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately e There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time Chapter 27 Remote Management P 660R T Series User s Guide 27 3 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled e Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 27 4 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when it is continuously updating the status in menu 24 1 or when sys stdio has b
229. restige to the computer put the other way around and binary to set binary transfer mode 215 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide 25 4 6 TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command titp 41 host put firmwar bin ras where i specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the Prestige s IP address and put transfers the file source on the computer firmware bin name of the firmware on the computer to the file destination on the remote host ras name of the firmware on the Prestige Commands that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 216 P 660R T Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 26 System Maintenance This chapter leads you through SMT menus 24 8 to 24 10 26 1 Command Interpreter Mode The Command Interpreter CI is a part of the main system firmware The CI provides much of the same functionality as the SMT while adding some low level setup and diagnostic functions Enter the CI from the SMT by selecting menu 24 8 See the included disk or the zyxel com web site for more detailed information on CI commands Enter 8 from Menu 24 System Maintenance A list of valid commands can be found by
230. rnet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network Press SPACE BAR to change No to Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 3 2 1 Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup 134 P 660R T Series User s Guide 135 Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Internet Access This chapter shows you how to configure the LAN and WAN of your Prestige for Internet access 17 1 Internet Access Overview Refer to the chapters on the web configurator s wizard LAN and WAN screens for more background information on fields in the SMT screens covered in this chapter 17 2 IP Policies Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis prior to the normal routing Create policies using SMT menu 25 see Chapter 28 on page 228 and apply them on the Prestige LAN and or WAN interfaces using menus 3 2 LAN and 11 3 WAN 17 3 IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for ea
231. rnnnnnnannnnnrnnnrnnannnnnennnennnnee 136 DEI el EE 136 TF ege 136 ke UE EE EE a a ER 137 TR PN 138 17 6 Internet Access Configuration rrnnnnnnneranrnnnnnnanrvanrnanrnnannnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 139 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration anxrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnennnnennnnnnnnennnuennnr 142 18 1 Remote Node Setup Overview Lugsaenasmenoslanenssesibhetettu nsiknnissie 142 FAE EE EE EE 142 18 2 1 Remote Node Profile vvs ee eege 142 18 2 2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios rrrrrrnneranennnnnnnnnnanennnrnnnnnn 143 18 2 2 1 Scenario 1 One VC Multiple Protocols rrrrnrrnnrrrnneranrvanrnnnnnr 143 18 2 2 2 Scenario 2 One VC One Protocol IP rrrarnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnrr 143 VS Scenario 3 Multiple VOS a cecersieapearcisaecssasatnesicionsantetiondertenens 143 18 2 3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol rrraneranennnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnennnrnnnennnene 145 18 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 146 18 3 1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses rrrrrrnnrnnnnnnnnenanennnnnnnnennnennnnnnnenn 147 18 4 Kemote NTN Ler Gees 148 18 4 1 Web Configurator Internet Security Filter Rules 149 18 4 2 Web Configurator Filter Sets REENEN 149 P 660R T Series User s Guide ee ATM Laver ODUONS RE 151 18 5 1 VC based Multiplexing non PPP Encapsulation 151 18 5 2 LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation rrarrrrarrrnrrrnnrvnnrnnnnnn 151 19 5 3 Advant Slup NN Dee 152 Chap
232. rom the Show list e Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 268 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 187 Macintosh OS X Network OO 18 Show All Confiqure IP Address Subnet Mask Router Network rem rt 72 K Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic rey Show Built in Ethernet Fei eoteraitE us Proxies Using DHCP Domain Name Servers Optional 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server 255 255 254 0 Search Domains Optional 192 168 10 11 DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff FA a Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure box select Manually e Type your IP address in the IP Address box e Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box e Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version 269 App
233. roubleshooting 252 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 173 Java Sun Internet Options x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Use inline AutoComplete a Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections a Java Sur Ch Use Java 2 v1 4 1_0F for lt applet requires restart Ej Micasa Java console enabled requires restart TT Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia TT Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Aadio toolbar TT Dont display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing m Restore Defaults 253 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 660R T Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications See also the Introduction chapter for a general overview of the key features Specification Tables Table 84 Device Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default Password 1234 DHCP Pool 192 168 1 32 to 192 168 1 64 111 mm L x 106 5 mm W x 35 mm H Weight 1709 Appendix A Product Specifications 254 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 85 Firmware ADSL Standards Multi Mode standard ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 G dmt G 992 1 G lite G992 2 ADSL2 G dmt bis G 992 3 ADSL2 G lite bis G 992 4 ADSL2 G 992 5
234. s N A The following table describes the diagnostic tests available in menu 24 4 for and the connections Table 65 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic FIELD DESCRIPTION Reset xDSL Re initialize the xDSL link to the telephone company Ping Host Ping the host to see if the links and TCP IP protocol on both systems are working Reboot System Reboot the Prestige Command Mode Type the mode to test and diagnose your Prestige using specified commands Host IP Address If you typed 12 to Ping Host now type the address of the computer you want to ping Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 204 P 660R T Series User s Guide 205 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance This chapter tells you how to backup and restore your configuration file as well as upload new firmware and configuration files 25 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file often called the romfile or rom 0 contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password DHCP Setup TCP IP Setup etc It arrives from ZyXEL with rom filename extension Once you have customized the Prestige s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension With many FTP and TFTP
235. s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only Many to Many Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end local IP address ILA If your rule is for all local IP addresses then enter 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to One and Server mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP Global End IP _ This is the ending global IP address IGA This field is N A for One to One Many to One and Server mapping types Server Mapping Only available when Type is set to Server Select a number from the drop down menu to choose a server set from the NAT Address Mapping Rules screen Click this link to go to the NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set screen to edit a server set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field Delete Click Delete to exit this screen without saving Chapter
236. s Translation NAT This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige 21 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server See Section 21 3 on page 164 or a detailed description of the NAT set for SUA The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types Note 1 Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 2 Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige 21 2 Applying NAT You apply NAT via menus 4 or 11 3 as displayed next The next figure shows you how to apply NAT for Internet access in menu 4 Enter 4 from the main menu to go to Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 162 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 93 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based VPI 8 VCI 35 ATM QoS Type UBR Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 My Login N A My Password N A ENET ENCAP Gateway N A IP Address Assignment Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to C
237. s for object variables within an agent e Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 23 2 Supported MIBs The Prestige supports RFC 1215 and MIB II as defined in RFC 1213 as well as ZyXEL private MIBs The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistic data and monitor status and performance 23 3 SNMP Configuration 193 To configure SNMP select option 22 from the main menu to open Menu 22 SNMP Configuration as shown next The community for Get Set and Trap fields is SNMP terminology for password Figure 129 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration Menu 22 SNMP Configuration SNMP Get Community public Set Community public Trusted Host 0 0 0 0 Trap Community public Destination 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the SNMP configuration parameters Table 59 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration SNMP Type the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Type the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trusted Host If you enter a trusted host your Prestige will only respond to SNMP messages from this address A blank default field means your Prestige will respond to all SNMP messages it receives regardless of source Tel Type the trap community w
238. s is the downstream speed of your Prestige This field displays the remote node index number and link type Link types are PPPoA ENET RFC 1483 and PPPoE Interface This field displays the type of port Status For the WAN port this displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For a LAN port this shows the port speed and duplex setting This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port RxPkts Errors This field displays the number of packets received on this port This field displays the number of error packets on this port This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second Rx B s Up Time This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Poll Interval s Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above w x G i Stop Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics 12 3 DHCP Table Screen 111 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP confi
239. s section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk FTP 1s the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your Prestige since FTP is faster Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete Note Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may permanently damage your Prestige 25 3 1 Restore Using FTP 211 For details about backup using T FTP please refer to earlier sections on FTP and TFTP file upload in this chapter Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 142 Telnet into Menu 24 6 Menu 24 6 System Maintenance Restore Configuration To transfer the firmware and configuration file to your workstation follow the procedure below 1 Launch the FTP client on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your Prestige Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put backupfilename rom 0 where backupfilename is the name of your backup configuration file on your workstation and rom 0 is the remote file name on the Prestige This restores the configuration to your Prestige 4 The system reboots automatically after a successful file transfer For d
240. s window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 266 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 184 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu P File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer r Apple System Profiler Calculator Chooser ADSL Control and Status Control Panels Appearance DL Favorites Apple Menu Options Key Caps AppleTalk Network Browser Colorsync Di Recent Applications rab Recent Documents EE ETNE cit Remote Access Status ean Energy Saver 2 Scrapbook Extensions Manager Sherlock 2 File Exchange Gi Speakable Items H File Sharing d i Stickies General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Updat
241. ses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection or a different WAN backup connection Recovery Interval sec When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection usually a WAN backup connection it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection Type the number of seconds 30 recommended for the Prestige to wait between checks Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic ICMP Timeout Type the number of seconds for an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response Traffic Redirect Press SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Select Yes and press ENTER to configure Menu 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Select No default if you do not want to configure this feature When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 15 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup 129 Configure parameters that determine when the Prestige will forward WAN traffic to the backup gateway using Menu 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 63 Menu 2 1Traffic Redirect Setup Menu 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Active No Configuration Backup Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric 15 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes th
242. smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 11 1 1 How do I know if m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 11 1 2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following e Dynamic port mapping e Learning public IP addresses e Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See Chapter 7 on page 76 for further information about NAT 11 1 3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 96 P 660R T Series User s Guide All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your int
243. ss SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Edit ATM Options Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options Edit Advance This field is only available when you select PPPoE in the Encapsulation field Options Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options Allocated Budget This sets a ceiling for outgoing call time for this remote node The default for this min field is 0 meaning no budget control Period hr This field is the time period that the budget should be reset For example if we are allowed to call this remote node for a maximum of 10 minutes every hour then the Allocated Budget is 10 minutes and the Period hr is 1 hour Schedule Sets This field is only applicable for PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation You can apply up to four schedule sets here For more details please refer to Chapter 29 on page 238 Nailed up This field is only applicable for PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation This field Connection specifies if you want to make the connection to this remote node a nailed up connection More details are given earlier in this section Edit Filter Sets Use SPACE BAR to choose Yes and press ENTER to open menu 11 5 to edit the filter sets See Section 18 4 on page 148 for more details Idle Timeout sec Type the number of seconds 0 9999 that can elapse
244. ss A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the text box below Connection Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in seconds in the Max Idle Timeout field The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time out which means the Internet session will not timeout Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected The schedule rule s in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings Network Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop sown list box Refer to the NAT Address chapter for more details Translation Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen 49 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 8 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access ID Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Internet Connection with RF
245. stige Web Configurator rrrrrrnrrrnnrrrnnnrnvnnrennnrennnrennnn 40 2 2 Resetting the le LE 41 Sech Using the Reset ER EE sonaia 42 2 3 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator uk 42 P 660R T Series User s Guide Chapter 3 ET EEE tears ae 44 TT 44 GF ee E 44 GE SEN JE 44 S12 PFF ENN 44 PT 44 EEE ENE EE EN 45 RT EEE a ET RE EE 45 3 1 2 1 NNN Noe 45 3 1 2 2 LLC based Multiplexing EE 45 RE EE Ke EE is EE ER RE 45 3 1 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen rrrnnrnnnrrnnnrvanrnanennnrnnnnnnnnnn 45 3 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnanennnnnnnnnnnnrnanennarnnnnnnnnnasennsennnenn 46 EP TN NNN Zeie Ae 47 3 2 1 1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation 47 3 2 1 2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation rerorarornnrrnrrrnnnnnnnn 47 3 2 1 3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation 0 47 3 2 1 4 Frivate IF TE 48 Je NARF Connection PPF cccaciasaminrcascasstinnabcaneisonanncannanvasnerenindieennaened 48 TEE 48 3 2 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup Second Screen rrrrnrnnnrrvanennnrnnernnnnennnnn 48 SE EE PRE RE EE OE E 52 SET EEN tege 52 3 2 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen rrrarnrnrnnnnnrnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennn 52 3 2 7 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Test 95 3 2 7 1 Test Your Internet Connection rnnrrnnrrnnrnnanrnanrvnnrnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 55 Chapter 4 Fasono SOUD TEE 56 HP NN NE 56 EE 0
246. t number in the End Port No field End Port No Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the Start Port No field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port No field above IP Address Enter your server IP address in this field Click Save to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 83 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens P 660R T Series User s Guide 7 6 Configuring Address Mapping Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by I rule so old rules 5 6 and 7 become new rules 4 5 and 6 To change your Prestige s address mapping settings click NAT Select Full Feature and click Edit Details to open the following screen Figure 28 Address Mapping Rules NAT A
247. t contain a 0 the first octet of a class A address can have a value of 0 to 127 Similarly the first octet of a class B must begin with 10 therefore the first octet of a class B address has a valid range of 128 to 191 The first octet of a class C address begins with 110 and therefore has a range of 192 to 223 Table 87 Allowed IP Address Range By Class ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY DECIMAL 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 41000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask has 32 is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 88 Natural Masks NATURAL MASK Subnetting 215 With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into ne
248. te Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Active Yes Encapsulation PPPoE Multiplexing LLC based Service Name Incoming Rem Login Rem P ssyuord gt x xxxx xxxx Outgoing My Login My Password Authen CHAP PAP Route IP Bridge No Edit IP Bridge No Edit ATM Options No Edit Advance Options Yes TELCO EE E Allocated Budget min 0 Period hr 0 Schedule Sets Nailed Up Connection No Session Options Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Move the cursor to the Edit Advance Options field press SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER to display Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 152 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 85 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options PPPoE pass through No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 46 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options PPPoE pass through Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to enable PPPoE pass through In addition to the Prestige s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for applications where NAT is not
249. ten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden sales Qzyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Customer Support 6 P 660R T Series User s Guide METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL support zyxel co uk 44 0 1344 303044 ZyXEL Communications UK 08707 555779 UK onl Ltd 11 The Courtyard UNITED KINGDOM y Eastern Road Bracknell sales zyxel co uk 44 0 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK a is the prefix number you enter to make an international telephone call 7 Customer Support P 660R T Series User s Guide Table of Contents NL 2 Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement 3 FT TDN 4 ADR EE 5 Customer Vel 6 pe EEE EN 8 Bg EN EN EE 18 BEE EEE NE 24 EET EEE EE EE ER vise raiment ER 28 Jee Tu EEE 30 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennn 32 NE 32 1 1 1 Features of the Prestige s re ANS edede 32 1 2 Applications for the e EE 36 Tal MN erer 36 1 2 2 LAN to LAN Application scsccesnscsdnerecinteascvxinstasscrassesdecrientkesntepeceauncsereessesonenes 37 1 3 Prestige Hardware Installation and Connection arrrrrnneranennrnnnrnanernnrnnnnnnennnenn 37 ta Fe ESO LEL NR 37 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator xrnnnxnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 40 2 1 Web Configurator e TEE 40 2 1 1 Accessing the Pre
250. ter 19 Stale ROUT EE 154 19 1 IF Statie Route S NN Jane iaai aN made 154 NNN 154 Chapter 20 Se EE REE 158 20 1 Bridging mM General EEE SENER ER 158 AA BETOOG ROMO DOD EE 158 20 2 1 Remote Node Bridging Setup rrrnnnrnannrnnrvanrrnannnnnrnnnrnnnrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnne 158 20 2 2 Bridge Static Route Setup EE 160 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT rnnnrnnnernnnernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnennnnnnn 162 21 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT rrrrnnnrnnannrnnnnnnnvnnnvnnnnnrnnnnnnrvnnsvnnnnn 162 ENN Ne 162 EEE REE EE 164 21 3 1 Address Mapping Sets EEN 164 21 3 1 1 SUA Address Mapping Set rrnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnrnnnnnnanennnnnnnnnnnnnn 165 21 3 1 2 User Defined Address Mapping Sets a nn0nnannnnnnennannnnnnnnnnnnnnna 166 EKN KO REE 167 21 4 Configuring a Server behind NAT rurrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnne 168 LA Cl NAT e LEE 170 21 5 1 Example 1 Internet Access Only nannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnnnennen 170 21 5 2 Example 2 Internet Access with an Inside Server cccccceeeeeeeees 171 21 5 3 Example 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers 172 21 5 4 Example 4 NAT Unfriendly Application Programs cccccceeeeee ees 175 Chapter 22 FOT 178 PN een 178 22 1 1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige rrrnrrranrrnannnanrranrrnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 179 22 2 Configuring a Filter Set for the
251. ter Sets Table Input Filter Sets Apply filters for incoming traffic You may apply protocol or device filter rules See earlier in this chapter for information on filters Output Filter Sets Apply filters for traffic leaving the Prestige You may apply filter rules for protocol or device filters See earlier in this section for information on types of filters Call Filter Sets Apply filters to decide if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call 22 7 1 Ethernet Traffic You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic however the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets reduce traffic and prevent security breaches Go to menu 3 1 shown next and type the number s of the filter set s that you want to apply as appropriate You can choose up to four filter sets from twelve by typing their numbers separated by commas for example 3 4 6 11 The factory default filter set NetBIOS LAN is inserted in the protocol filters field under Input Filter Sets in menu 3 1 in order to prevent local NetBIOS messages from triggering calls to the DNS server Figure 126 Filtering Ethernet Traffic Menu 311 GAN Port Filter Setup Apply filter 3 to block NETBIOS traffic from the Input Filt r SEES LAN protocol filters 3 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 22 1 2 Remote Node Filters Go to menu 11 5 shown next and type the number s of the fi
252. the Size MBS MBS The MBS must be less than 65535 My Login Configure the My Login and My Password fields for PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the login name that your ISP gives you If you are using PPPoE encapsulation then this field must be of the form user domain where domain identifies your PPPoE service name Chapter 17 Internet Access 140 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 43 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup continued FIELD DESCRIPTION My Password Enter the password associated with the login name above ENET ENCAP Enter the gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you are using ENET Gateway ENCAP encapsulation Idle Timeout This value specifies the number of idle seconds that elapse before the Prestige automatically disconnects the PPPoE session IP Address Press SPACE BAR to select Static or Dynamic address assignment Assignment IP Address Enter the IP address supplied by your ISP if applicable Network Address Press SPACE BAR to select None SUA Only or Full Feature Please see Translation Chapter 21 on page 162 for more details on the SUA Single User Account feature Address Mapping Type the numbers of mapping sets 1 8 to use with NAT See Chapter 21 on page Set 162 for details When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel If all your settings are cor
253. thernet RFC 2516 from your computer to an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit which connects to ADSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN For more information on PPPoE see the appendices 3 1 1 3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The Prestige encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP Chapter 3 Wizard Setup WW 44 P 660R T Series User s Guide 3 1 1 4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to the RFC for more detailed information 3 1 2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP 3 1 2 1 VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assig
254. this information is retained your Prestige will not have to recompile the tables when the line comes back up 20 2 2 Bridge Static Route Setup Similar to network layer static routes a bridging static route tells the Prestige the route to a node before a connection is established You configure bridge static routes in menu 12 3 1 go to menu 12 choose option 3 then choose a static route to edit as shown next Figure 92 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route Men 12 31 Eart Bridge Static Route Route 1 Route Name Active No Ether Address IP Address Gateway Node 1 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the Edit Bridge Static Route menu Table 49 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route i Ether Address Type the MAC address of the destination mere that you want to bridge the packets to IP Address If available type the IP address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to Gateway Node Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the number of the remote node one to eight that is the gateway of this static route When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 20 Bridging Setup 160 P 660R T Series User s Guide 161 Chapter 20 Bridging Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 21 Network Addres
255. tige is compatible with the major ADSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer providers making configuration as simple as possible for you Multiplexing The Prestige supports VC based and LLC based multiplexing Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPoA RFC 2364 PPP over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1483 encapsulation over ATM MAC encapsulated routing ENET encapsulation as well as PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 Network Management Menu driven SMT System Management Terminal management Embedded web configurator CLI Command Line Interpreter Remote Management via Telnet or Web SNMP manageable DHCP Server Client Relay Built in Diagnostic Tools Syslog Telnet Support Password protected telnet access to internal configuration manager TFTP FTP server firmware upgrade and configuration backup support supported Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige P 660R T Series User s Guide e Supports OAM F4 F5 loop back AIS and RDI OAM cells Other PPPoE Features e PPPoE idle time out e PPPoE Dial on Demand Diagnostics Capabilities The Prestige can perform self diagnostic tests These tests check the integrity of the following circuitry e FLASH memory e ADSL circuitry e RAM e LAN port Packet Filters The Prestige s packet filtering functions allows added network security and management Ease of Installation Your Prestige is designed for quick intuitive and easy installation Housing Your Pres
256. tige s compact and ventilated housing minimizes space requirements making it easy to position anywhere in your busy office 1 2 Applications for the Prestige Here are some example uses for which the Prestige is well suited 1 2 1 Internet Access The Prestige is the ideal high speed Internet access solution Your Prestige supports the TCP IP protocol which the Internet uses exclusively It is compatible with all major ADSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer providers A DSLAM 1s a rack of ADSL line cards with data multiplexed into a backbone network interface connection for example T1 OC3 DS3 ATM or Frame Relay Think of it as the equivalent of a modem rack for ADSL A typical Internet access application is shown below Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 36 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 1 Prestige Internet Access Application LAN a Internet D Internet Single User Account For a SOHO Small Office Home Office environment your Prestige offers the Single User Account SUA feature that allows multiple users on the LAN Local Area Network to access the Internet concurrently for the cost of a single IP address 1 2 2 LAN to LAN Application You can use the Prestige to connect two geographically dispersed networks over the ADSL line A typical LAN to LAN application for your Prestige is shown as follows Figure 2 Prestige LAN to LAN Application Sie LAN 2 EJ lt gt a o
257. ting Ethernet Fast Ethernet Interface s This auto negotiation feature allows the Prestige to detect the speed of incoming transmissions and adjust appropriately without manual intervention It allows data transfer of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network Auto Crossover MDI MDI X 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Interface s These interfaces automatically adjust to either a crossover or straight through Ethernet cable Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS support you can have a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address allowing the host to be more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider Multiple PVC Permanent Virtual Circuits Support Your Prestige supports up to 8 PVC s ADSL Standards e Full Rate ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 Gdmt G 992 1 with line rate support of up to 8 Mbps downstream and 832 Kbps upstream G lite G 992 2 with line rate support of up to 1 5Mbps downstream and 512Kbps upstream e Supports Multi Mode standard ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 Gdmt G 992 1 Glite G992 2 e TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol network layer protocol e ATM Forum UNI 3 1 4 0 PVC e Supports up to 8 PVCs UBR CBR VBR e Multiple Protocol over AALS RFC 1483 e PPP over AALS RFC 2364 e PPP over Ethernet over AALS RFC 2516 e RFC 1661 e PPP over PAP RFC
258. tion 1 To configure an IP static route use Menu 12 Static Route Setup shown next Chapter 19 Static Route Setup 154 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 87 Menu 12 Static Route Setup 2 From menu 12 select 1 to open Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup shown next Menu 12 Static Route Setup IP Static Route Bridge Static Route Please enter selection Figure 88 Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup Om xy AU VS WN EF KO LO Lil Las Tos TA 15 16 Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Serup Enter selection number 3 Now type the route number of a static route you want to configure Figure 89 Menu12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Menu 12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Route 1 Route Name Active No Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric 2 Private No 155 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 19 Static Route Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide The following table describes the fields for Menu 12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Setup Table 47 Menu12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for this destination
259. tion This chapter provides information on configuring remote management 10 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which Prestige interface if any from which computers You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via Internet WAN only e ALL LAN and WAN e LAN only Neither Disable To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field You may only have one remote management session running at a time The Prestige automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows 1 Telnet 2 HTTP 10 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when e A filter in SMT menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN is applied to block a Telnet FTP or Web service e You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens e The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately e There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration 92 P 660
260. tive Select this check box to have the Prestige use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down Note If you activate traffic redirect you must configure at least one Check WAN IP Address Metric This field sets this route s priority among the routes the Prestige uses The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost Backup Gateway Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige s Internet connection terminates Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 6 WAN Setup 74 P 660R T Series User s Guide 19 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige 7 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used withi
261. to base the rule on the fields in the IP and the upper layer protocol for example UDP and TCP headers To configure TCP IP rules select TCP IP Filter Rule from the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule as shown next Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 182 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 119 Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Menu 21 1 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Filter 1 1 Filter Type TCP IP Filter Rule Active No IP Protocol 0 IP Source Route No Destination IP Addr IP Mask Port Port Comp None Source IP Addr IP Mask Port Port Comp None TCP Estab N A More No Log None Action Matched Check Next Rule Action Not Matched Check Next Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes how to configure your TCP IP filter rule Table 56 Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule FIELD DESCRIPTION Filter This is the filter set filter rule coordinates for instance 2 3 refers to the second filter set and the third filter rule of that set Filter Type Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to choose a rule Parameters displayed for each type will be different Choices are TCP IP Filter Rule or Generic Filter Rule Select Yes to activate or No to deactivate the filter rule IP Protocol This is the upper layer protocol for example TCP is 6 UDP is 17 and ICMP is 1 The value must be between 0 and 255 A value of 0 matches ANY protocol IP Source Route
262. traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the Prestige Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660R T Series User s Guide 11 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add ar remove component select or clear the check box If the check bos it shaded only part of the component will be Installed To see what s included in component click Details Components ii EE Address Book E g Communications 5 6 MB LJ At Desktop Themes 0 0 ME hel d Games 10 1 MB ii iL A Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 4 4 ME Space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk DE 2 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services Sof 10 components selected Det
263. ts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment In a residential house where a Prestige is installed you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet 61 Chapter 5 LAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 16 Any IP Example Va B NN ge Internet 192 168 10 1 WE i Vv by A Sir F Ce T eme KT Gel LI em Internet 192 168 10 1 192 168 1 1 The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the Prestige s IP address Note You must enable NAT SUA to use the Any IP feature on the Prestige 5 5 1 How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices the Prestige to decide which hop to use to help forward data along to its specified destination The following lists out the steps taken when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the Prestige 1 When a computer which is in a different subnet first attempts to access the Internet it sends packets to its default gate
264. ture Edit Details The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 NAT Mode foescriprion None Select this radio button to disable NAT SUA Only Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige The Prestige uses Address Mapping Set 1 in the NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set Screen 7 5 Configuring SUA Server Note If you do not assign an IP address in Server Set 1 default server the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Click NAT select SUA Only and click Edit Details to open the following screen Refer to Table 16 on page 80 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 82 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 27 Edit SUA NAT Server Set NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set Kg Start Port No End Port No IP Address 2 bP KI G bP PT fo gt a BP KI ai PP PT poo gt BP KI 7 bP PI fo gt ai BP b m ai bP KI mwm e b m mi KIK a gt ei KIK fm gt ave Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Edit SUA NAT Server Set LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Port No Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the End Port No field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end por
265. twork number bits By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the left most bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Appendix C IP Subnetting P 660R T Series User s Guide Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 89 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 90 Two Subnets Example IP Address 192 168 1 O IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 o Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000
266. u 3 LAN Setup Menu 3 LAN Setup 1 LAN Port Filter Setup 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 16 1 1 General Ethernet Setup This menu allows you to specify filter set s that you wish to apply to the Ethernet traffic You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic however the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets reduce traffic and prevent security breaches Figure 65 Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel If you need to define filters please read Chapter 22 on page 178 first then return to this menu to define the filter sets Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup 132 P 660R T Series User s Guide 16 2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup Depending on the protocols for your applications you need to configure the respective Ethernet Setup as outlined below e For TCP IP Ethernet setup refer to Section 17 6 on page 139 e For bridging Ethernet setup refer to Chapter 20 on page 158 16 3 CP IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP Use menu 3 2 to configure your Prestige for TCP IP To edit menu 3 2 enter 3 from the main menu to display Menu 3 LAN Setup When menu 3 appears press 2 and press ENTER to display Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup as shown next Figure 66 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup
267. uch as an Internet account user name and password is required or the Prestige cannot connect to the ISP you will be redirected to web screen s for information input or troubleshooting Zero configuration for Internet access is disable when the Prestige is in bridge mode e you set the Prestige to use a static fixed WAN IP address 6 6 Configuring WAN Setup To change your Prestige s WAN remote node settings click WAN and WAN Setup The screen differs by the encapsulation Chapter 6 WAN Setup 68 P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 19 WAN Setup PPPoE WAN WAN Setup Name MyISP Mode Routing Encapsulation PPPOE Multiplex LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI VC ATM QoS Type Cell Rate Peak Cell Rate celliser Sustain Cell Rate cellfsec Maximum Burst Size Login Information service Name User Name user iso ch Password IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Connection Nailed Up Connection fe Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout PPPoE Pass Through ero Configuration Back Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 WAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider e g MylSP This information is for identification purposes only Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select
268. ule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule so as old rule 5 becomes rule 4 old rule 6 becomes rule 5 and old rule 7 becomes rule 6 Table 52 Menu 15 1 1 First Set FIELD DESCRIPTION Set Name Enter a name for this set of rules This is a required field If this field is left blank the entire set will be deleted Action The default is Edit Edit means you want to edit a selected rule see following field Insert Before means to insert a rule before the rule selected The rules after the selected rule will then be moved down by one rule Delete means to delete the selected rule and then all the rules after the selected one will be advanced one rule None disables the Select Rule item Select Rule When you choose Edit Insert Before or Delete in the previous field the cursor jumps to this field to allow you to select the rule to apply the action in question Note You must press ENTER at the bottom of the screen to save the whole set You must do this again if you make any changes to the set including deleting a rule No changes to the set take place until this action is taken Selecting Edit in the Action field and then selecting a rule brings up the following menu Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule in which you can edit an individual rule and configure the Type Local and Global Start End IPs Note An End IP address must be numerically greater than its corresponding IP Start address
269. ule Setup 11 Remote Node Setup 12 Static Routang Setup 15 NAT Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 121 Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT P 660R T Series User s Guide 13 2 1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary e CH D GA O1 5 OD 5 LO C 3 3 D 3 lt MENU TITLE DESCRIPTION General Setup WAN Backup Setup LAN Setup Internet Access Setup Use this menu to set up your general information Use this menu to setup traffic redirect Use this menu to set up your LAN connection A quick and easy way to set up an Internet connection Remote Node Setup Use this menu to set up the Remote Node for LAN to LAN connection including Internet connection 2 Static Routing Setup NAT Setup Filter Set Configuration SNMP Configuration System Password Use this menu to set up static routes Use this menu to specify inside servers when NAT is enabled Use this menu to configure filters Use this menu to set up SNMP related parameters QD Use this menu to change your password 4 System Maintenance This menu provides system status diagnostics software upload etc OT NIN NINININI ma gt AJOJI NM gt N OT IP Routing Policy Setup Use this menu to configure your IP routing policy 6 Schedule Setup Exit Use this menu to schedule outgoing calls Use this to exit from SMT and return to a blank screen 13 3 Changing the System Password Change the Prestig
270. ule rules Refer to Chapter 29 on page 238 SMT connection If you use PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation check the idle time out setting Refer to disconnects Chapter 6 on page 66 web configurator or Chapter 18 on page 142 SMT Contact your ISP Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 244 P 660R T Series User s Guide 30 8 Problems with Remote Management Table 82 Troubleshooting Remote Management PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION manage the remote management may not be possible aaa Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN Refer to Section 30 5 on page 243 for instructions on checking your WAN connection See also Section 30 9 on page 246 245 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 660R T Series User s Guide 30 9 Problems with the Web Configurator Table 83 Troubleshooting the Web Configurator PROBLEM cannot access the web configurator CORRECTIVE ACTION Refer to the Quick Start Guide for hardware connections Make sure that there is not an SMT console session running Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on remote management for details For WAN access you must configure remote management to allow server access from the Wan or all Refer to the chapters on remote management for details Your computer s and the Prestige s IP addresses must be on the same subnet for LA
271. up the connection automatically if it is disconnected The schedule rule s in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings Connection Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in seconds in the Max Idle Timeout field The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time out which means the Internet session will not timeout Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time The Network This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Address Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop sown list box Refer to Chapter Translation 7 on page 76 for more details Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen 3 2 5 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Prestige provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 3 2 5 1 IP Pool Setup The Prestige is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP a
272. ur IP Policy sets from 12 by typing in their numbers separated by commas Configure the filter sets in menu 25 first see Chapter 28 on page 228 Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the cost measurement with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Type a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need and then apply them here When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 18 3 1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses The following figure uses sample IP addresses to help you understand the field of My WAN Addr in menu 11 3 Refer to the previous Figure 15 on page 58 for a brief review of what a WAN IP is My WAN Addr indicates the local Prestige WAN IP 172 16 0 1 in the following figure while Rem IP Addr indicates the peer WAN IP 172 16 0 2 in the following figure 147 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 75 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP IP LAN to LAN Connection Local Network Remote Network 192 168 1 0 DSL Lines 192 168 1 1 18 4 Remote Node Filter Move the cursor to the Edit Filter Sets field in menu 11 1 then press SPACE BAR to select Yes Press ENTER to display Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Use Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter to specify the filter
273. urce addr start 1 1 1 1 end 1 1 1 1 port start 20 end 20 Destination addr start 2 2 2 2 end 2 2 2 2 port start 20 end 20 Action Matched Gateway addr POA LOS wd al Log No Type of Service Max Thruput Precedence 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 73 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy DESCRIPTION Policy Set Name This is the policy set name assigned in Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to activate or No to deactivate the policy Inactive policies are displayed with a minus sign in SMT menu 25 IP Protocol IP layer 4 protocol for example UDP TCP ICMP etc Type of Service Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing from Don t Care Normal Min Delay Max Thruput Min Cost or Max Reliable Precedence Precedence value of the incoming packet Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a value from 0 to 7 or Don t Care Packet Length Type the length of incoming packets in bytes The operators in the Len Comp next field apply to packets of this length Len Comp Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to choose from Equal Not Equal Less Greater Less or Equal or Greater or Equal addr start end Source IP address range from start to end Specifies whether action should be taken on criteria Matched or Not Matched 231 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing P 660R T Series User s Gui
274. ust be specified for each protocol Figure 82 Menu 11 6 for VC based Multiplexing Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options VPL VOI VC Multiplesing NEE EEN EE For IPs VC Options for Bridge VPI 8 VPI 1 VCI 35 VCI 36 ATM QoS Type UBR ATM QoS Type N A Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 Peak Cell Rate PCR N A Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 Sustain Cell Rate SCR Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 Maximum Burst Size MBR N A N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 18 5 2 LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation For LLC based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header 151 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 83 Menu 11 6 for LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options VPI VCI LLC Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation VPI VCI ATM QoS Type UBR Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size PCR 0 SCR 0 MBS 0 ENTER here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL In this case only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI 1s 32 to 65535 1 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic 18 5 3 Advance Setup Options In menu 11 1 select PPPoE in the Encapsulation field Figure 84 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11 1 Remo
275. way which is not the Prestige by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN 3 The Prestige receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table Once the ARP table is updated the computer is able to access the Internet through the Prestige 5 When the Prestige receives packets from the computer it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer After all the routing information is updated the computer can access the Prestige and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the Prestige Chapter 5 LAN Setup 62 P 660R T Series User s Guide 5 6 Configuring LAN Click LAN and LAN Setup to open the following screen Figure 17 LAN Setup LAN LAN Setup DHCP DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 158 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHF Server KZ TCP IP IP Address Damen IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 RIP Direction Boh RIP Version PFIP 2B sl Multicast None gt Any IP Setup IY Active Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP be DHCP If set to Server your Prestige can assign
276. when the Prestige is idle there is no traffic going to the remote node before the Prestige automatically disconnects the remote node 0 means that the session will not timeout When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 18 2 3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol For obvious reasons you should employ the strongest authentication protocol possible However some vendors implementation includes specific authentication protocol in the user profile It will disconnect if the negotiated protocol is different from that in the user profile even when the negotiated protocol is stronger than specified If the peer disconnects right after a successful authentication make sure that you specify the correct authentication protocol when connecting to such an implementation 145 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration P 660R T Series User s Guide 18 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options For the TCP IP parameters perform the following steps to edit Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options as shown next 1 In menu 11 1 make sure IP is among the protocols in the Route field 2 Move the cursor to the Edit IP Bridge field press SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER to display Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Figure 74 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11
277. y to set binary transfer mode 25 2 7 TFTP Command Example The following is an example TFTP command erto i host get rom 0 contig rom 66 1 99 where i specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the Prestige IP address get transfers the file source on the Prestige rom 0 name of the configuration file on the Prestige to the file destination on the computer and renames it config rom 25 2 8 GUl based TFTP Clients The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 210 P 660R T Series User s Guide Table 68 General Commands for GUI based TFTP Clients DESCRIPTION Host Enter the IP address of the Prestige 192 168 1 1 is the Prestige s default IP address when shipped Send Fetch Use Send to upload the file to the Prestige and Fetch to back up the file on your computer Local File Enter the path and name of the firmware file bin extension or configuration file rom extension on your computer Remote File This is the filename on the Prestige The filename for the firmware is ras and for the configuration file is rom O0 Transfer the file in binary mode Stop transfer of the file Refer to Section 25 2 5 on page 209 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN 25 3 Restore Configuration Thi
278. y your ISP when you select Gateway ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field ENET ENCAP encapsulation only Zero Configuration This feature is not applicable available when you configure the Prestige to use a static WAN IP address or in bridge mode Select Yes to set the Prestige to automatically detect the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and make the necessary configuration changes Select No to disable this feature You must manually configure the Prestige for Internet access Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 7 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet An example is shown in the figure below 71 Chapter 6 WAN Setup P 660R T Series User s Guide Figure 20 Traffic Redirect Example por Backup Gateway The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network Put the protected LAN in one subnet Subnet I in the following figure and the backup gateway in another subnet Subnet 2 Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN Subnet 1 to the backup gateway
279. you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhep from the drop down list e Ifyou have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen 4 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 190 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS File Profile Help ph You may configure the system s hostname domain d name servers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path Active Profile Common modified 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 191 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate redhat config network a d You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device erh the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration fi
280. ystem Information amp Diagnosis 196 System Maintenance 196 198 207 210 215 218 219 221 System Management Terminal 120 System Status 197 System Timeout 93 226 T TCP IP 93 187 204 Telecommunication Line Cord 4 Telephone 6 Telnet 93 118 Telnet Configuration 93 TFTP Restrictions 225 TFTP File Transfer 215 TFTP Restrictions 92 209 Thunderstorm 4 Time and Date Setting 220 Time Zone 221 Timeout 129 TOS Type of Service 228 Trace Records 200 Traffic Redirect 71 72 Setup 129 Traffic redirect 71 traffic redirect 33 Traffic shaping 67 Transmission Rates 33 Type of Service 228 230 231 232 U UBR Unspecified Bit Rate 70 Universal Plug and Play 96 Application 96 Security issues 96 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 33 Universal Plug and Play Forum 97 UNIX Syslog 200 201 301 UNIX syslog parameters 201 Upload Firmware 213 UPnP 96 User Name 89 V VBR Variable Bit Rate 70 VC based Multiplexing 143 Vendor 4 Ventilation Slots 4 Virtual Channel Identifier VCI 45 virtual circuit VC 45 Virtual Path Identifier VPI 45 Voltage Supply 4 Voltage High 4 VPI amp VCI 45 W Wall Mount 4 WAN Wide Area Network 66 WAN backup 72 WAN Setup 128 Warnings 4 Water 4 Water Pipes 4 Web Configurator 40 42 web configurator screen summary 42 web service 246 Web Site 6 Wet Basement 4 Worldwide Contact Information 6 X XMODEM protocol 207 Z Zero Configurati

ZyXEL ADSL2+ User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents